M32 Operating Manual

OPERATING MANUALfor

MAZATROL M-32

MANUAL No.: H731SA0576E

Serial No.:

NC equipment:

01. 1995

PRECAUTIONS

f Before operating this machine, please read this manual with care and fully understand the contents of the manual so that

the machine can exert its performance safely.

f Although the contents of this manual are closely checked for perfection, if there is any ambivalent point, incorrect

description, or omission, contact us, please.

f In order to explain the details, all the illustrations contained in this manual do not necessarily show the covers, doors,

safety guards, or shields. Therefore, be sure to restore all the specified covers, shields, etc., and observe the contents

of the manual when operating this machine. If this precaution is ignored, a serious accident may incur, resulting in

damage to the important units of the machine and other accessories.

f This manual is subject to modifications and changes as required for the improvement in, and the change in the

specification of, the machine and the CNC equipment, as well as for usability of the manual itself. The modifications and

changes are indicated by updating the manual numbers in a revised version.

f When your manual is damaged or lost, and a new material is needed, inform us of the “manual number.”

If the manual number is not identified, inform us of the following:

1. Name of the machine 2. Number of the machine 3. Name of the manual

ü Contact the Techincal Center (TC) or the Service Center (SC) of Yamazaki Mazak for operations of this machine and

replacement of the manual.

Issue of the manual : Manual Editional Section of Engineering Generalization Section,

Yamazaki Mazak Co., Ltd.

Notes:

PREFACE

This manual offers a general description of MAZATROL M-32 (hereinafter referred

to as the NC equipment developed for the machining center). Detailed description

of each individual machining center is given in the Operating manual accompanying

the relevant machine. Descriptions in the machine operating manuals govern that

given in this manual.

This manual describes both the standard functions and options of the NC

equipment. The relevant machine operation manual should be used to check

whether or not the particular function of the NC equipment is an option.

This manual contains operational restrictions and prohibitions/inhibitions as many as

possible. However, since all such items cannot be actually covered in the manual,

items that are not clearly described as “permitted” should be read to mean “non-

permitted”.

- Documents that accompany the product

Standard

1. Operating manual for machine

2. Maintenance manual for machine

3. Operating manual for MAZATROL M-32 (This manual)

4. Programming manual for MAZATROL M-32 Application

5. Basic operating manual for MAZATROL M-32

6. Parameter list M-32

7. Alarm list M-32

Option

1. Programming manual for MAZATROL M-32 EIA/ISO

2. Programming manual for 3-D processing

3. Programming manual for five-surface machining

4. CPU-LINK communication software preparation procedure

5. Operating manual for MAZATROL CAM32-A system

6. Operating manual for MAZATROL editor

7. Operating manual for Multi-Plane machining programs

8. Programming manual for MAZATROL M-32 Multi-Plane machining

9. Programming manual for MAZATROL M-32 Multi-Plane machining (EIA/ISO)

10. Operating manual for HDLC

11. Operating manual for Geometry compensation function

12. Operating manual for High-speed machining mode feature

1

Notes:

1. Transcription, reproduction or alteration of part or all of this document without

the prior written permission of the publisher is prohibited.

2. The contents of this document are subject to change without prior notice.

3. Ambiguities or errors, if any, in this document should be communicated to

your YAMAZAKI MAZAK products service station.

2

OPERATING PRECAUTIONS

Safety Precautions

This NC equipment is provided with various safety interlocks to protect men and

machinery from unexpected accidents and machine failures. Those who are to

operate the NC equipment, however, should strictly observe the following precau-

tions without relying completely on such safety interlocks:

1. Carefully read the operating manuals and the programming manual to obtain a

through understanding of the functions of the NC equipment, and to operate

the equipment correctly.

2. After turning on the power switch on the operating panel, do not carry out any

other operations before the l READY (ready for operation) lamp comes on.

3. Immediately turn off the main circuit breaker in the event of a power failure.

4. Before actuating a key or switch on the operating panel, be sure to make a

visual check to ensure that the key or switch is the correct one.

5. Do not touch any keys or switches with wet hands or with gloves being worn.

6. Before changing a parameter, make sure of its type and value.

7. Parameters are one of the most important factors in providing proper control of

the machines. A machine malfunction may result from tampering with a

parameter setting key or switch.

To Ensure Smooth Operation

Always keep the following in mind to ensure smooth operation.

1. Before connecting or disconnecting the transmission cable of the terminal

equipment for data I/O to or from the NC equipment, be sure to unplug the

power cable of the terminal equipment from the receptable.

2. If the power of the NC equipment is remained off for over about two months, or

if it no longer becomes possible for the battery to back up the power because

of the expiry of the battery life, erroneous operations, or other contingencies,

stored data such as programs, parameters, etc. may be erased. You should

therefore save the entire necessary machining program data, tool data, and

parameter data into external output units. Also, beware that in the following

cases, it becomes necessary to reload data such as machining program data:

(1) If battery alarms occur

(2) If the CPU card is replaced

3

(3) If the memory card containing the machining programs is replaced

See section 4-9 DATA IN/OUT Display for data saving procedures.

Note:

The contents of the memory must be deleted to expand the machining

program data capacity. Reloading of the machining program data and other

data is also required in that case.

3. - If the NC power is to be left turned off for a long period, remove the lead

storage battery (or disconnect the recharger from the load) and store the

battery or recharger in a cold, dry place. They do not need be stored into a

refrigerator, however.

- During the storage period, recharge the battery at least once every six

months.

- Beware that the battery deteriorates even during the storage period.

- If the storage battery is to be stored for an extended period, fully recharge the

battery and store it in a dry, cold place (temperatures from 20 to +40

degrees C).

(4E)

CONTENTS

Page

PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

OPERATING PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1. OPERATING PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-1 Layout of Keys, Pushbuttons, Switches, and Indicator Lamps on

the Operating Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-2 Functions of Keys, Pushbuttons, and Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

1-3 Description of Indicator Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

1-3-1 Machine status indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

1-3-2 Touch-sensor indicator lamps (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18E

2. DISPLAY DATA AND SCREEN OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2-1 Name of the Components of Each Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2-2 Types of Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

2-3 Procedure for Calling up a Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

3. PROCEDURES FOR DATA INPUT, CANCELLATION,

AND CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3-1 Setting Numeric Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3-2 Setting Menu Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3-3 Erasing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2E

3-4 Modifying Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2E

4. DESCRIPTION OF EACH DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4-1 POSITION Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

4-2 COMMAND Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

4-3 TRACE Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

4-4 WK. PROGRAM Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

4-4-1 PATH CHECK display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

4-4-2 PROGRAM FILE display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

4-4-3 SHAPE CHECK display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

4-4-4 SECTION CHECK display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

4-4-5 PLANE CHECK display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

4-5 TOOL FILE Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

4-6 TOOL DATA Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42

4-6-1 Tool data “GROUP NO. ASSIGNMENT” (Option) . . . . . . . . . . 4-60

4-6-2 Tool data “INVALIDATION” (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67

4-7 TOOL LAYOUT Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72

4-8 PARAMETER Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85

H731SA0576E

C-1

4-9 DATA IN/OUT Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87

4-9-1 DATA IN/OUT (CMT) display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89

4-9-2 DATA IN/OUT (DNC) display (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98

4-9-3 DATA IN/OUT (TAPE) display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102

4-10 EIA/ISO INFOR Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112

4-10-1 TOOL OFFSET DATA display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113

4-10-2 WORK OFFSET DATA display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118

4-10-3 MACRO VARIABLE display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122

4-10-4 TOOL LIFE INDEX display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126

4-11 MODAL INFO. Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136

4-12 ALARM Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138

4-13 PROCESS WORK Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138

4-13-1 PRG. LAYOUT PROCE. display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142

4-14 Machining Management Functions (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143

4-14-1 Function overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144

4-14-2 Scheduled-operation function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145

4-14-3 External unit skipping function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152

4-14-4 External multi-piece machining function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154

4-14-5 Jig offsetting function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157

4-14-6 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160

4-14-7 Machining management data writing macro-program . . . . . . . . 4-160

4-15 EIA Program Monitoring Functions (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-166


4-15-2 PROGRAM MONITOR display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-168

4-15-3 Description of the monitoring function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-170

4-15-4 Program start position designation function . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-172-2

4-15-5 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-172-4

4-16 Added Fundamental Coordinates Function (Option) . . . . . . . . 4-173


4-16-2 ADDITIONAL WPC display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-173

4-16-3 Address setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-174

4-16-4 Considerations to measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-175

4-16-5 Operating notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-175

4-17 On-machine Measurement (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-176


4-17-2 Use of on-machine measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-176

4-17-3 Measurement pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-178

4-17-4 MEASURE display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-181

4-17-5 Measuring procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-184

4-17-6 Mode and menu changeover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-187

4-17-7 Data storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-189

4-17-8 Graph of straightness data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-189

4-17-9 Five-surface machining option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-191

4-17-10 Coordinates writing function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-193

4-17-11 Measurement results copying function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-197

C-2

4-18 Workpiece Measurement Printout System (Option) . . . . . . . . . 4-198


4-18-2 System configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-204

4-18-3 Parameter registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-206

4-18-4 Program configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-209

4-18-5 Explanations of programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-214

4-18-6 Program and measurement pattern chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-237

4-18-7 Output of measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-239

4-18-8 Alarm displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-242

4-18-9 Program and printout example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-243

4-19 Commercial Printer Connect Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-248

4-19-1 Printers Yamazaki Mazak recommends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-248

4-19-2 Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-248

4-19-3 Specification of the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-249

4-19-4 Parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-250

4-19-5 Explication of the setting parameter data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-250

4-20 EIA COMMAND Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-258

4-20-1 Description of the monitoring function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-260

4-20-2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-261

4-21 MAZATROL Program DC Input/Output (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-262


4-21-2 Transfer conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-262

4-21-3 Operating procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-263

4-21-4 Description of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-263

4-21-5 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-264

4-22 Program Management Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-265

4-22-1 Prohibition of selected-program editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-265

4-22-2 Prohibition of selected-program call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-265

4-22-3 Selected-program erasure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-266


4-23 Program-Name Tape Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-267


4-23-2 Transfer conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-267

4-23-3 Operating procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-268

4-23-4 Tape format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-268


4-23-6 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-269

5. PRINTOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

6. DATA WRITE INHIBIT CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

C-3

(C-4E)

5. Functions and usage of other menu data

When the TOOL DATA display is called up on the screen, the following menu

will be displayed in the menu display area:

EDIT TEACH INCR. TOOL

SEARCH

PREVIOUS

PAGE

NEXT

PAGE . . .

Pressing the menu key EDIT causes the following menu to display.

TOOL

ERASE

TOOL NAME

ORDER

T-DATA

MOVE

TOOL

ASSIGN

Of the menu, the TEACH, TOOL ASSIGN , and T-DATA MOVE menu items

have already been described. (See screen operations 2., 3., and 4.,

respectively.)

The functions and usage of the other menu data indicated on the TOOL DATA

display are described below.

In the description given below, it is to be assumed that the TOOL DATA

display is already on the screen and that menu is currently being displayed in

the menu display area.

(1) INCR.

INCR. (Incremental) can be used only when changing the data that has been

input to the ACT-z or LENGTH item on the TOOL DATA display.

After the menu key INCR. has been pressed, the data that has already been

input can be overridden simply by keying-in the increment (or decrement) that

is appropriate to that data.

[1] Assume that the cursor already remains in a blinking state in the position of the

ACT-z or LENGTH item.

[2] Press the menu key INCR.

- This will cause the display status of INCR. to reverse and the message

LENGTH TO ADD? to present.

[3] Using the numeric keys, specify the increment (or decrement) that corresponds

to the data already input. After that, press the input key .

Example:

When the cursor is blinking in the position shown below:

TNO. TOOL NOM-z ACT-z LENGTH COMP.

1 F-MILL 80.A 80. 100. 0.

2 E-MILL 10.A 10. 100. 0.

3 CTR-DR 20. ! 100. 0.

4 DRILL 10. ! 100. 0.

5 DRILL 7. ! 100. 0.

6 TAP 8. 8. 100. 0.M

4-55

1) To change the ACT-z data of the end-mill from 10 mm (0.39 in) to 10.02

mm (0.39 in), first press the menu key INCR. and then press the ,

, , and keys, in that order.

2) To change the ACT-z data of the end-mill from 10 mm (0.39 in) to 9.9

mm (0.39 in), first press the menu key INCR. and then press the ,

, , and keys in this order.

- The results of the addition (or subtraction) will then be displayed.

- In addition, the reverse-display status of INCR. will be released

automatically.

Note:

INCR. is quite useful for correcting tool data if a work has been overcut or

undercut during a machining operation.

(2) TOOL SEARCH

This menu item should be used to search for a tool name that is registered on

the TOOL DATA display.

[1] Press the menu key TOOL SEARCH .

- This will cause the message TOOL NAME TO SEARCH <INPUT>? to

display and, in the menu display area, the following menu to present:

ENDMILL FACEMILL CHAMF

CUTTER

BALL

ENDMILL

OTHER

TOOL

TOUCH

SENSOR

ÆÆÆ

. . .

- By pressing the menu key ÆÆÆ, it becomes possible to change the above

menu over to the following menu:

CENTER

DRILL

DRILL BACK SPOT

FACER

REAMER TAP BORING

BAR

BACK BOR.

BAR

CHIP

VACUUM

ÆÆÆ

. . .

[2] From among menus and , select the menu item that corresponds to the

tool name to be searched for, and press the appropriate menu key.

- This will cause the display status of the selected menu to reverse and the

message NOMINAL DIAMETER OF TOOL? to present.

[3] Using the appropriate numeric key(s), specify the nominal diameter value of the

tool name to be searched for. Then, press the input key .

- If the tool name to be searched for is already registered, the cursor will

appear in the position of the TOOL item of that tool name.

4-56

Example:

When checking the pocket number under which a drill with a nominal diameter

of 10 mm (0.39 in) is registered:

After pressing the menu key DRILL in procedural step [2], press the ,

, and keys in this order in procedural step [3].

This will cause the cursor to appear in the position shown below.


1 F-MILL 80.A 80. 0.

2 E-MILL 10.A 10. 0.

3 CTR-DR 20. ! 0.

4 RILL 10. ! 0.

5 DRILL 7. ! 0.

6 TAP 8. 8. 0.

D

M

This shows that the tool name to be searched for is registered under pocket

number 4.

[4] If the input key is pressed following this, the NC equipment will check

whether the corresponding tool name exists in subsequent lines to that in which

the cursor is blinking.

- If the corresponding tool name exists, the cursor will move to the TOOL item

of that tool.

- If the corresponding tool name does not exist, the alarm message 407

RELEVANT DATA NOT FOUND will be displayed.

Note:

It is also possible to search for the corresponding tool name just by specifying

TOOL item. In this case, press only the input key in procedural step [3]

without specifying the nominal diameter.

(3) PREVIOUS PAGE and NEXT PAGE

On the TOOL DATA display, only up to 16 sets of tool data can be indicated

per page. The seventeenth and subsequent sets of tool data are indicated on

the second and subsequent pages of the display.

Pressing the menu key NEXT PAGE causes the next page of the TOOL DATA

display to present.

Pressing the menu key PREVIOUS PAGE causes the immediately previous

page of the TOOL DATA display to present.

(4) TOOL ERASE

Use this menu item to erase tool data registered on the TOOL DATA display.

4-57

[1] Press and hold down the key or until the cursor has moved to the

tool data you want to erase.

Example:

On the display shown below, if the E-MILL data of tool number 2 is to be

erased:

TNO. TOOL NOM-z ACT-z LENGTH COMP

1 F-MILL 80.A 80. 0.

2 -MILL 10.A 10. 0.

3 CTR-DR 20. ! 0.

4 DRILL 10. ! 0.

5 DRILL 7. ! 0.

6 TAP 8. 8. 0.

Move the cursor to this position.

E

M

- The following menu will then be displayed in the menu display area:


SERACH

PREVIOUS

PAGE

NEXT

PAGE

[2] Press the menu key EDIT.

- The following menu will be displayed.

TOOL

ERASE

TOOL NAME

ORDER

T-DATA

MOVE

TOOL

ASSIGN

[3] Press the menu key TOOL ERASE .

- This will cause the display status of TOOL ERASE to reverse and the

message CURSOR POSITION ERASE ? to present.

[4] Press the input key .

- Data in the cursor position will be erased.

(5) TOOL NAME ORDER (Valid only for machines with a random ATC feature)

For machines having a random ATC feature, use this menu item if the tool data

previously registered on the TOOL DATA display is to be rearranged in order

of tool name.

[1] The following menu is being indicated in the menu display area:


SERACH

PREVIOUS

PAGE

NEXT

PAGE

4-58


- The following menu will then be displayed.

TOOL

ERASE

TOOL NAME

ORDER

T-DATA

MOVE

TOOL

ASSIGN

[3] Press the menu key TOOL NAME ORDER .

- This will cause the display of TOOL NAME ORDER to reverse and the

message LAYOUT ON TOOLNAME ORDER <INP>? to display.


- The tool data will be rearranged in order of tool name.

If there are more than one set of tool data having the same name, those sets

of tool data will be rearranged in order of the smaller nominal diameter first.

The order of tool name refers to the following order:

—CTR-DR “DRILL ”REAM ‘TAP (M, U, PT, PF, PS, OTHER, in that

order) ’BK ÷FACE ◊B-B BAR ÿCHF-M ŸF-MILL ⁄E-MILL OTHER C

HP VAC T.SENS B-E-MILL

Example:

To rearrange the tool data on the following display:

TNO. PKNO. TOOL NOM-z ACT-z LENGTH COMP.

1 2 F-MILL 80.A 80. 0.

2 3 E-MILL 10.A 10. 0.

3 5 CTR-DR 20. ! 0.

4 10 DRILL 10. ! 0.

5 1 DRILL 7. ! 0.

6 4 TAP 8. 8. 0.

TOOL NAME ORDER +


1 5 CTR-DR 20. ! 0.

2 1 DRILL 7. ! 0.

3 10 DRILL 10. ! 0.

4 4 TAP 8. 8. 0.

5 2 F-MILL 80.A 80. 0.

6 3 E-MILL 10.A 10. 0.

M

M

(6) Setting PKNO. data (Valid only for machine with a random ATC feature)

If your machine has a random ATC feature, use the following procedure to set

PKNO. item on the TOOL DATA display (PKNO. data can be set even during

the write-protected data mode).

4-59

[1] Using the key or , move the cursor to a position under PKNO. item

where you want to set data.

- The message POCKET NUMBER? will be displayed.

[2] Specify the pocket number, and press the input key .

- The pocket number will be set in PKNO. item.

Example:

On the following display, if 3 is to be set as the pocket number of the end-mill

tool having tool number 2:


1 2 F-MILL 80.A 80. 0.

2 E-MILL 10.A 10. 0.

3 5 CTR-DR 20. ! 0.

4 10 DRILL 10. ! 0.

5 1 DRILL 7. ! 0.

6 4 TAP 8. 8. 0.M


To set 3 in the PKNO. item, press the and keys, in that order.

4-6-1 Tool data“GROUP NO. ASSIGNMENT” (Option)

1. Overview

The tool data option “GROUP NO. ASSIGNMENT” allows you to assign group

numbers and ID (identification) numbers to your MAZATROL tool data. With

this option, you can perform EIA/ISO program tool selection and tool life

management using the MAZATROL tool data. Selection of the data of the

TOOL LIFE INDEX display or the data of the TOOL DATA display can be

made using a parameter.

2. Screen display (TOOL DATA display)

Group numbers (GROUP NO.) and ID numbers (ID NO.) are displayed in the

same position as that of tool name (TOOL) and nominal diameter (NOM-z)

display.

Use menu keys to select between EIA/ISO data display and MAZATROL data

display.

4-60

TOOL DATA display

M3S024

TNO. GROUP NO. ID NO. ACT-z LENGTH COMP. AUXIL. THR. HP LIFE (M) TIME (M)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

EDIT TEACH INCR. EIA/ISO

DATA

EDIT TEACH INCR. MAZATROL

DATA

PREVIOUS

PAGE

NEXT

PAGE

* * * TOOL DATA * * *

* * * TOOL DATA * * *

Data type selection

3. Description of group numbers and ID numbers

(1) Group number (GROUP NO.)

Description: A group number identifies a tool group. Tools with the

same number as a group number are handled as spare

tools of that group number.

Setting range: Eight decimal digits (0 to 99999999)

(2) ID number (ID NO.)

Description: An ID number identifies a tool. Use ID numbers for

machines having a tool identification feature. (For machines

not having a tool identification feature, ID numbers become

insignificant. In this case, these numbers can be used to

identify tools.)

Setting range: There are the following two ranges of ID number setting.

Which is to be applied depends on the type of tool ID:

1) Eight decimal digits (0 to 99999999)

2) Seven hexadecimal digits (0 to FFFFFFF)

Use method 2) for machines not having a tool identification

feature.

4-61

4. Editing

Any group number “GROUP NO.” or ID number “ID NO.” can be set,

irrespective of the tool name “TOOL''. It depends on the tool type that has

been set for TOOL, however, whether you can set tool diameter data “ACT-z”,

tool tip position offset data “COMP.'', auxiliary data “AUXIL.'', thrust force data

“THR.'', horsepower data “HP'', tool life data “LIFE(M)'', and tool operation

time data “TIME (M)''.

(1) How to set group numbers or ID numbers

[1] Move the cursor to GROUP NO. item or ID NO. item.


1

2 ! 220.589 3. ! 0 0 50 42

3 ! 256.472 3. ! 0 0 50 5

4 9.956 198.576 0. 0 0 0 40 2

Note:

For tool data not having a registered tool name, the cursor cannot be moved

beyond the right of ID NO item.

[2] Set data using the numeric keys.


1 1 0000000 ! ! 0 0 0 0

2 1 0000000 ! 220.589 3. ! 0 0 50 42

3 ! 256.472 3. ! 0 0 50 5

4 9.956 198.576 0. 0 0 40 2

Notes:

1. You can set tool diameter data “ACT-z”, length data “LENGTH”, thrust

force data “THR.”, horsepower data “HP”, tool life data “LIFE (M)”, and

tool operation time data “TIME (M)” if a group number is set for tool data

not having a registered tool name.

2. Both group numbers and ID numbers can be displayed just by setting data

for either GROUP NO. item or ID NO. item.

4-62

(2) Editing using menu

The tool editing menu on the MAZATROL data display and those of the

EIA/ISO data display partly differ in contents.

Tool editing menu on the MAZATROL data display

TOOL

ERASE

TOOL NAME

ORDER

T-DATA

MOVE

TOOL

ASSIGN

— “ ” ‘

Tool editing menu on the EIA/ISO data display

INPUT

CANCEL

T-DATA

MOVE

’ ”

Menu key description

— TOOL ERASE: Deletes entire one line of tool data. (The group

number and ID number on that line are also deleted.)

“ TOOL NAME ORDER: Rearranges tool data on a tool name basis.

” T-DATA MOVE: Interchanges two sets of tool data.

‘ TOOL ASSIGN: Registers MAZATROL tool data for TOOL item.

’ INPUT CANCEL: Deletes only the group number and ID number. (For

data not having a registered tool name, other data is

also deleted.)

The following describes the procedure to perform INPUT CANCEL menu

function ’:

[1] Move the cursor to the TNO. item corresponding to the data you want to delete

on the TOOL DATA display.

[2] Press the EDIT menu key, and then press the INPUT CANCEL menu key.

[3] Press the input key . The registered group number and the ID number will

then be deleted.

5. Machine action

Use the following parameter to specify whether the data of the TOOL DATA

display or the data of the TOOL LIFE INDEX display is to be used to select

tools and manage tool lives:

User parameter F94, bit 7

0: Using the data of the TOOL DATA display (MAZATROL)

1: Using the data of the TOOL LIFE INDEX display

4-63

Note:

If the TOOL DATA display (MAZATROL) is selected, you will use tool name data

“TOOL”, nominal diameter data “NOM-z”, suffix data, tool diameter data “ACT-z”,

length data “LENGTH”, thrust force data “THR.”, horsepower data “HP”, tool life

data “LIFE (M)”, and tool operation time data “TIME (M)”.

(1) Tool selection

Tools can be selected using one of the two methods listed below. The method

used is to be selected using the following parameter:


0: Selection on a group number basis

1: Selection on a tool number basis

1) Selection on a group number basis

Specify a programmed tool command (T-command) by group number

Example:

Program: T01T00M06;


1 ! 198.578 0. ! ! ! 0 0

2 1 0000000 ! 220.589 3. ! 0 0 0 0

3 2 0000000 ! 256.472 6. ! 0 0 0 0

4 9.986 198.256 0. 0 0 0 0

TOOL DATA display

In this example, “TNO. 2” is selected.

Note:

If the selected group number is an unregistered one, that selected number will

be regarded as a tool number ,and the tool of that number wil be selected.

2) Selection on a tool number basis

Specify a programmed tool command (T-command) by tool number.

Example:

Program: T01T00M06;


1 ! 198.578 0. ! ! ! 0 0

2 1 00000000 ! 220.589 3. ! 0 0 0 0

3 2 00000000 ! 256.472 6. ! 0 0 0 0

4 9.986 198.256 0. 0 0 0 0

TOOL DATA display

In this example, “TNO. 1” is selected.

4-64

(2) Tool life management

For spare tool search associated with tool life management, the form of

identifying and searching for a spare tool is to be selected using user

parameters.

1) Identifying a spare tool

— Tools having the same group number are regarded as spare tools

(Group number scheme)

“ Tools having the same tool name, nominal diameter, and suffix are regarded

as spare tools

(Tool name scheme)


0: Group number scheme

1: Tool name scheme

2) Searching for a spare tool

— Searching spare tools in order of registered tool number

(Tool registration order scheme)

“ Searching for a spare tool in order of the longest tool life first

(Equal-life scheme)


0: Tool registration order scheme

1: Equal-life scheme

These four methods are described in detail below.

a) Group number scheme

All tools having the same group number that have been registered under group

numbers are regarded as spare tools. This scheme is the same as that which

is to be used on the TOOL LIFE INDEX display.

Example:


1 12345678 0000000 ! ! 0 0 0 0

2 12345678 0000000 ! ! 0 0 0 0

3 12345678 0000000 ! ! 0 0 0 0

4

5 87654321 0000000 ! ! 0 0 0 0

6

7 87654321 0000000 ! ! 0 0 0 0

TOOL DATA display

- Tool registered under “TNO. 2” and “TNO. 3” are spares for tools registered

under “TNO. 1.”

- Tools registered under “TNO. 7” are spares for tools registered under “TNO.

5.”

4-65

b) Tool name scheme

All tools having the same tool name, nominal diameter, and suffix are regarded

as spare tools. This scheme is the same as that which is to be used for tool life

management of MAZATROL programs.

Example:

TNO. TOOL NOM-z ACT-z LENGTH COMP. AUXIL. THR. HP LIFE (M) TIME (M)

1 E-MILL 10.A 10. 0. 0 0 0 0

2 E-MILL 10.A 10. 0. 0 0 0 0

3 E-MILL 10.C 10. 0. 0 0 0 0

4 E-MILL 10.A 10. 0. 0 0 0 0

TOOL DATA display

- Tools registered under “TNO. 2” and “TNO. 4” are spares for tools registered

under “TNO. 1.”

c) Tool registration order scheme

The tool registration order scheme refers to a scheme in which a spare tool is

to be found by searching in ascending order of tool number and the next spare

tool is to be searched for when the life of the tool being used expires.

Example:


1 1 0000000 ! 198.746 3. ! 0 0 50

2 1 0000000 ! 220.589 3. ! 0 0 50 0

3 1 0000000 ! 256.472 3. ! 0 0 50 0

4 1 0000000 ! 205.784 3. ! 0 0 50 0

TOOL DATA display

Program T01T00M06; “TNO. 2” is selected.

50

Note:

In this example, the machine acts the same, irrespective of whether you select

the tool number scheme or the group number scheme.

d) Equal-life scheme

The equal-life sheme refers to a scheme in which spare tool search is

performed in order of the longest tool life first. For this scheme, changeover

from the current tool to the next one may occur even if the life of the former

does not expire.

4-66

Example:


1 1 0000000 ! 198.746 3. ! 0 0 50 35

2 1 0000000 ! 220.589 3. ! 0 0 50 42

3 1 0000000 ! 256.472 3. ! 0 0 50 5

4 1 0000000 ! 205.784 3. ! 0 0 50 28

TOOL DATA display

Program T01T00M06; “TNO. 3” is selected.

(3) Tool offsetting

If tool management using the TOOL DATA display is selected (by setting bit 7

of user parameter F94 to “0”), the following user parameters must be set to

make tool diameter (ACT-z) and length (LENGTH) offset data valid: (See the

Programming manual for MAZATROL M-32 EIA/ISO for further details.)

User parameter F92, bit 7 1: Tool diameter data (ACT-z) is made valid.

User parameter F93, bit 3 1: Length data (LENGTH) is made valid.

User parameter F94, bit 2 1: Length (LENGTH) offset data is not

cancelled by execution of a reference-point

return command.

Note:

During offsetting based on the tool diameter and length data of the TOOL

DATA display, these two types of data will be added to tool diameter and

length offset data you are to set in the program using commands G41 to G44.

Example:

For tool length offsetting, if you set:

G43Z0. H01;

Length = 100., H01 = 50.

then the offset data becomes 150.

6. Precautions

Tool life management (spare tool search) is not performed for tool path check.

4-6-2 Tool data “INVALIDATION” (Option)

1. Overview

“INVALIDATION” is an option that makes registered tool data on the TOOL

DATA display invalid before the program is executed. On the invalidated tool

data line, tool names (TOOL) and nominal diameters (NOM-z), (and as data

options, group numbers (GROUP NO.) and ID numbers (ID NO.)) are

highlighted purple for distinction from valid tool data.

Using this option, you can select tools from all those of the same type or set

the tools not to be used without deleting the tool data before executing the

program.

4-67

2. Setting the option

Use the appropriate menu key to specify whether you want to make tool data

valid or invalid.

[1] Move the cursor to the data line to be made valid/invalid.


1 DRILL 5.A ! 180.153 1.5

2 RILL 10.A ! 220.589 3.

3 DRILL 20.A ! 256.472 3.

4 E-MILL 10.B 9.956 198.576 0.

5 CTR-DR 10. ! 198.896 0.2

6 E-MILL 5. 5. 123. 0.

D


EDIT TEACH INCR. EIA/ISO

DATA

TOOL

SERACH

PREVIOUS

PAGE

NEXT

PAGE


TOOL

ERASE

TOOL NAME

ORDER

T-DATA

MOVE

TOOL

ASSIGN

TOOL DATA

VALID

TOOL DATA

INVALID

[3] If the selected data is to be made valid/invalid, press the menu key TOOL

DATA VALID , TOOL DATA INVALID respectively.


The tool name and the nominal diameter are highlighted purple if invalid, or not

highlighted if valid.


1 DRILL 5.A ! 180.153 1.5

2 DRILL 10.A ! 220.589 3.

3 DRILL 20.A ! 256.472 3.

4 E-MILL 10.B 9.956 198.576 0.

5 CTR-DR 10. ! 198.896 0.2

6 E-MILL 5. 5. 123. 0.

3. Machine action

Only in the following cases, MAZATROL tool data designated as invalid and

highlighted purple are regarded as invalid tool data.

- When automatic operation is selected

- When tool path check is performed

- When the TOOL LAYOUT display is called

4-68

(1) When automatic operation is selected

The machine action differs as follows between MAZATROL program automatic

operation and EIA/ISO program automatic operation:

1) MAZATROL program operation

Invalid tools are excluded from a list of usable tools. An alarm 626 NO

TOOL IN MAGAZINE will be displayed if an alternative, usable tool of the

same type is not present.

2) EIA/ISO program operation

The MAZATROL tool data invalidation option is inoperative for automatic

operation using EIA/ISO programs, since the option normally operates

independently of MAZATROL tool data. Only if MAZATROL tool length and

diameter offset data is valid, however, does this option become operative.

In this case, if the MAZATROL tool data of the selected tool number is

invalid, operation will stop with the display of an alarm 653 ILLEGAL TOOL

DESIGNATED after tool change has been done.

Example:


1 E-MILL 10.A 9.965 185.653 0. 0. 0 0 0 0

2 CTR-DR 8.B ! 169.157 0. ! ! ! 0 0

3 DRILL 8.B ! 175.469 2.4 ! 0 0 0 0

4 F-MILL 100.B 100. 98.487 0. ! ! 0 0 0

T01 T02 M06;G90 G54;

Program MAZATROL tool data

— If MAZATROL tool length and diameter offset data is valid (that is, if tool

diameter data is made valid using bit 7 of user parameter F92 and tool

length data is made valid using bit 3 of user parameter F93):

Operation will stop with the display of an alarm 653 ILLEGAL TOOL

DESIGNATED.

“ If MAZATROL tool length and diameter offset data is invalid:

Normal operation continues.

Note:

Operation will also stop with an alarm display, if a block that contains a

command for tool change with an invalid tool is found during EIA/ISO search

associated with restart.

(2) When tool path check is to be performed

The machine action differs as follows between tool path check using a

MAZATROL program and tool path check using an EIA/ISO program:

1) During tool path check using a MAZATROL program

Invalid tools are not selected. If an alternative, usable tool of the same type

is not present, a tool path will be drawn in the absence of a tool (diameter

offsetting will use the tool nominal diameter data existing in the program).

2) During tool path check using an EIA/ISO program

The machine act becomes similar to that existing during automatic

operation.

4-69

(3) When the TOOL LAYOUT display is selected

All invalid tools will be highlighted purple.

TOOL LAYOUT display

M3S025

CURRENT

PKNO. TOOL NOM-z PKNO. TOOL NOM-z

1 E-MILL 10.A 17 TAP 8.

2 CTR-DR 8.B 18 DRILL 15.5

3 DRILL 8.B 19 E-MILL 13.4

4 F-MILL 100.B 20 E-MILL 12.3

5 21 DRILL 23.

6 22 DRILL 6.9

7 E-MILL 20.A 23 DRILL 7.5

8 24 E-MILL 13.3

9 E-MILL 20.B 25 E-MILL 30.D

10 26 E-MILL 7.8

11 27 E-MILL 28.4

12 DRILL 16. 28 DRILL 8.7

13 29 DRILL 5.1

14 30 E-MILL 26.

15 DRILL 10.4

16 DRILL 22.

NEXT WORK NO. 10


0 CTR-DR 12.A

0 DRILL 10.A

0 DRILL 20.

0 DRILL 30.

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

M

WORK NO. DRUM NO. SPARE T

ERASE

PKNO.

CLEAR

PKNO.

SHIFT

PKNO.

ASSIGN

SPARE T

ADDITION

LAYOUT

FINISH

NEXT

PAGE

* * * TOOL LAYOUT * * *( )

PAGE1/1PAGE1/1

- With PKNO. SHIFT, the tool numbers of invalid tools are not assigned to

tools displayed under NEXT.

4. Operator actions for a machine having the tool data option “GROUP NO.

ASSIGNMENT”, and the machine action

(1) Screen display

As with the usual MAZATROL data display mode, invalid tools during the

EIA/ISO data display mode (group number display) are highlighted purple on

the screen.


1 E-MILL 10.A 9.965 185.653 0. 0. 0 0 0 0

2 CTR-DR 8.B ! 169.157 0. ! ! ! 0 0

3 DRILL 8.B ! 175.469 2.4 ! 0 0 0 0

4 F-MILL 100.A 100. 198.487 0. ! ! 0 0 0

MAZATROL data display mode

TNO.GROUP NO. ID NO. ACT-z LENGTHCOMP. AUXIL. THR. HP LIFE (M) TIME (M)

1 12345678 0000000 9.965 185.653 0. 0. 0 0 0 0

2 23456789 0000000 ! 169.157 0. ! ! ! 0 0

3 34567890 0000000 ! 175.469 2.4 ! 0 0 0 0

4 45678901 0000000100. 198.487 0. ! ! 0 0 0

EIA/ISO data display mode

4-70

(2) Machine action

When the MAZATROL tool data option “GROUP NO. ASSIGNMENT” is used,

tool commands in an EIA/ISO program are executed according to the group

number data of the MAZATROL tool data display.

The machine action during automatic operation (or tool path check) based on

an EIA/ISO program, therefore, differs from that occurring with the tool data

option “GROUP NO. ASSIGNMENT” not being used.

The machine acts as follows according to the particular method of selecting

tools:

1) Group number scheme (User parameter F94, bit 4 = 0)

- The machine will stop with the display of an alarm 653 ILLEGAL TOOL

DESIGNATED if the tools of the selected group number are all invalid

ones.

- If the tools of the selected group number include valid ones (life-expired or

broken tools included), then these valid tools will be searched for a spare

tool.

2) Tool number scheme (User parameter F92, bit 4 = 1)

- When the tool of the selected tool number is invalid:

— If a group number has been set, a spare tool search will be made

using that group number. The machine action after the search has

been made is the same as that described for the group number

scheme above.

“ If a group number has not been set, an alarm 653 ILLEGAL TOOL

DESIGNATED will result.

Examples of action:

TNO.GROUP NO. ID NO. ACT-z LENGTH COMP. AUXIL. THR. HP LIFE (M) TIME (M)

1 12345678 0000000 9.965 187.584 ! ! 0 0 0 0

2 100. 154.876 0. ! ! 0 0 0

3 87654321 0000000 4.986 154.784 ! ! 0 0 0 0

4 87654321 0000000 4.957 159.764 ! ! 0 0 0 0

TOOL DATA display

* Tools of “TNO. 1” and “TNO. 3” are invalid ones.

Differences in machine action between the two tool selection schemes:

Group number scheme Tool number scheme

Example 1: If T12345678T0M06; is set on the TOOL

DATA display above:

An alarm 653 ILLEGAL TOOL DESIGNATED results.

Example 1: If T01T0M06; is set on the TOOL DATA

display above:

An alarm 653 ILLEGAL TOOL DESIGNATED results.

Example 2: If T87654321T0M06; is set on the TOOL

DATA display above:

Tool number (TNO.) 4 is selected.

Example 2: If T03T0M06; is set on the TOOL DATA

display above:

Tool number (TNO.) 4 is selected.

Note:

The machine action during automatic operation and that of tool path check are

almost the same.

4-71

4-7 TOOL LAYOUT Display

Function:

- This display should be called on the screen when assigning pocket numbers to

the tools to be used for machining. (The operation of assigning pocket numbers to

the tools to be used is referred to as tool layout.)

- This display consists of two subdisplays: a CURRENT display (left half of the

screen display) and a NEXT display (right half of the screen display).

The CURRENT display indicates the names and nominal diameters of the tools

which already are each assigned a pocket number. That is, the CURRENT display

indicates the same status of tool registration as with the TOOL DATA display.

The NEXT display indicates the names and nominal diameters of all the tools

necessary to execute the specified machining program.

- A tool name(s) that has already been registered can be erased on the CURRENT

display.

- The two component display can be used only when executing a MAZATROL

program.

Data of the TOOL LAYOUT display:

M3S026

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

—

PAGE 1/

PKNO.123456789

10111213141516

TOOL********

NOM-z999.9*

“ ”

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

—

PKNO.17181920212223242526272829303132

TOOL********

“

NOM-z999.9*

”

PKNO.1

TOOL********

NOM-z999.9*

“ ”

PKNO.17

TOOL********

“

NOM-z999.9*

”——

PAGE 1/5

CURRENT NEXT

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

‘ WORK NO. 9999


ERASE

PKNO.

CLEAR

PKNO.

SHIFT

PKNO.

ASSIGN

SPARE T

ADDITION

LAYOUT

FINISH

NEXT

PAGE

* * * TOOL LAYOUT * * *( )

Note:

Values in the display denote the maximum value of each type of data.

4-72

Description of data:

No. Data name Unit Description

— PKNO. Pocket number

“ TOOL Tool name

NOM-z mm (inch) Nominal diameter of the tool

Suffix (Code that identifies tools of the same nominal diameter)

‘ WORK NO. Workpiece number of the specified program

”

Display operations:

1. Tool layout procedure

To execute a machining program, the tools necessary for machining must be

mounted in each pocket of a tool drum in advance. The operation of assigning

pocket numbers to the tools to be used for machining is referred to as tool

layout, and its operating procedure is described below.

[1] First, call up the TOOL LAYOUT display on the screen.

- The names and nominal diameters of the tools which have already been

registered will be indicated on the CURRENT display. (No display will be

presented if no tools have been registered.)

- After that, the following menu will be indicated in the menu display area:

DRUM NO. SPARE T

ERASE

PKNO.

CLEAR

PKNO.

SHIFT

PKNO.

ASSIGN

SPARE T

ADDITION

LAYOUT

FINISH

NEXT

PAGE

This will have already been placed in a reverse-display

status by the time that the display is called on the screen.

WORK NO.

- The message WORKPIECE PROGRAM NUMBER? will be displayed.

[2] Using the appropriate numeric key(s), specify the workpiece number of the

machining program to be executed. Then, press the input key .

Example:

When laying out the tools to be used under the program whose workpiece

number is 123:

Press the , , , and keys, in this order.

- This will cause the reverse-display status of WORK NO. to clear and the

input workpiece number to display in the WORK NO. item (data portion ‘).

- The names and nominal diameters of all the tools to be used under the

program whose workpiece number has been input will be indicated on the

NEXT display. Under the PKNO. item, 0 will be displayed for any tool name.

- The message PKNO. SHIFT OR ASSIGN <MENU>? will be displayed.

4-73

[3] Subsequent operations differ according to several factors such as the

registration status of the tools which are already registered on the CURRENT

display. However, separate or combined use of the three methods described

below makes it possible in any cases to assign pocket numbers to all the tools

to be used. Select the most appropriate method according to the particular tool-

registration or other status.

(A) Pocket-number shift

(B) Automatic pocket-number assignment

(C) Manual pocket-number assignment

(A) Pocket-number shift

If there are the same tools as those which are already registered on the

CURRENT display among the tools being indicated on the NEXT display then,

it is no longer necessary to assign pocket numbers to such tools. That is, the

pocket numbers that have already been assigned can be shifted as they are.

This method is referred to as pocket-number shift. Once a pocket-number shift

operation has been carried out, it suffices just to assign pocket numbers to the

tools for which no shift operations have been carried out. Use of this method

allows prevention of reassignment of different pocket numbers to a tool or of

the same pocket number to more than one tool. It will also save time in

assignment.

[A-1] Press the menu key PKNO. SHIFT.

- This will cause the display status of PKNO. SHIFT to reverse and the

message POCKET NO. SHIFT <INPUT>? to present.

[A-2] Press the input key .

- If there are the same tools as those which are already registered on the

CURRENT display among the tools being indicated on the NEXT display,

then the pocket numbers already assigned under PKNO. of the

corresponding tool names on the NEXT display will shift automatically and

will be indicated in reverse form.

Example:

If the following data is displayed when the workpiece number of a machin-

ing program has been input in the procedural step [2] above:

CURRENT NEXT WORK NO. 123

PKNO. TOOL NOM-z PKNO. TOOL NOM-z PKNO. TOOL NOM-z PKNO. TOOL NOM-z

1 F-MILL 80.A 17 0 F-MILL 80.A 17

2 E-MILL 10.A 18 0 E-MILL 10.A 18

3 TAP 8. 19 0 CTR-DR 20. 19

4 CHF-M 20.A 20 0 DRILL 10. 2

5 21 0 DRILL 7. 21

6 22 0 TAP 8. 22

M

M

4-74

* Of the tools being indicated on the NEXT display, a face-mill with a

nominal diameter of 80 mm (3.15 in), and end-mill with a nominal diameter

of 10 mm (0.39 in), and a tap with a nominal diameter of 8 mm (0.31 in)

are already registered on the CURRENT display. Here, if procedural steps

[A-1] and [A-2] are carried out, then the display will change as follows:



1 F-MILL 80.A 17 1 F-MILL 80.A 17

2 E-MILL 10.A 18 2 E-MILL 10.A 18

3 TAP 8. 19 0 CTR-DR 20. 19

4 CHF-M 20.A 20 0 DRILL 10. 20

5 21 0 DRILL 7. 21

6 22 3 TAP 8. 22

M

M

The pocket numbers on the CURRENT display will shift automatically and

their display status will be reversed.

- Subsequently, the reverse-display status of PKNO. SHIFT will be cleared.

Note:

In the above example, when pocket numbers are assigned to all the

remaining tools (that is, a spot drill with a nominal diameter of 20 mm

(0.79 in), a drill with a nominal diameter of 10 mm (0.39 in), and a drill

with a nominal diameter of 7 mm (0.28 in)) by method (B) or (C)

described below, the pocket-number assignment procedure for all the

tools will be completed.

(B) Automatic pocket-number assignment

This method is one in which, among the tool names being displayed on the

NEXT display, all those with pocket numbers of 0 (undetermined) are

automatically assigned serial pocket numbers, starting with the top tool name

on the display first.

[B-1] Press the menu key PKNO. ASSIGN .

- This will cause the display status of PKNO. ASSIGN to reverse and the

message POCKET NO. ASSIGN <INPUT>? to present.

[B-2] Press the input key .

- Serial pocket numbers will then be automatically assigned to each tool that

has a pocket number of 0 (undetermined), starting with the top one on the

display first.

Example 1:

When the names of the tools to be used are being indicated on the NEXT

display as shown next:

4-75

NEXT WORK NO. 123


0 F-MILL 80.A

0 E-MILL 10.A

0 CTR-DR 20.

0 DRILL 10.

0 DRILL 7.

0 TAP 8.M

Here, if procedural steps [B-1] and [B-2] are carried out, then the display

will change as follows:

NEXT WORK NO. 123


1 F-MILL 80.A

2 E-MILL 10.A

3 CTR-DR 20.

4 DRILL 10.

5 DRILL 7.

6 TAP 8.M

Example 2:

In the example shown below, if pocket numbers are already assigned to the

face-mill with a nominal diameter of 80 mm (3.15 in), the end-mill with a

nominal diameter of 10 mm (0.39 in), and the tap with a nominal diameter

of 8 mm (0.31 in) (see the example in the description of “Pocket-number

shift” above):

NEXT WORK NO. 123


1 F-MILL 80.A

2 E-MILL 10.A

0 CTR-DR 20.

0 DRILL 10.

0 DRILL 7.

3 TAP 8.M

4-76

Here, if procedural steps [B-1] and [B-2] are carried out, then the display

will change as follows:

NEXT WORK NO. 123


1 F-MILL 80.A

2 E-MILL 10.A

4 CTR-DR 20.

5 DRILL 10.

6 DRILL 7.

3 TAP 8.M

Except the pocket numbers already assigned (i.e., pocket number 1, 2,

and 3), serial ones will be assigned starting with the top tool name on the

display first.

- Subsequently, the reverse-display state of PKNO. ASSIGN will be

cleared.

Note:

In this method, the data being indicated on the CURRENT display will be

disregarded.

(C) Manual pocket-number and tool interference data assignment

This method is one in which the tools being indicated on the NEXT display are

respectively assigned serial pocket numbers and tool interference data one by

one.

[C-1] Press either the cursor key or to call the cursor on the screen.

- If the key is pressed, the cursor will appear in the position of the first

PKNO. item on the NEXT display.

- If the key is pressed, the cursor will appear in the position of the final

PKNO. item on the NEXT display.

[C-2] Press either the cursor key or to move the cursor to the row in

which the tool name to be assigned a pocket number is being displayed.

Example:

If the screen on the NEXT display is presented as shown below (see the

example given in the description of “Pocket-number shift” above) and

pocket number 4 and tool interference data are to be assigned to a spot

drill with a nominal diameter of 20 mm (0.79 inch):

4-77

NEXT WORK NO. 123


1 F-MILL 80.A

2 E-MILL 10.A

0 CTR-DR 20.

0 DRILL 10.

0 DRILL 7.

3 TAP 8.


M

- The message POCKET NO.? will be displayed.

[C-3] Using the appropriate numeric key(s), specify the pocket number to be

assigned. Then, press the input key .

- The input pocket number will then be displayed in the position where the

cursor is blinking.

- In the example shown above, press the and keys in that order.

[C-4] Pressing moves cursor to the right of the nominal diameter data

suffix.

- The message TOOL INTERFERENCE ID CODE? will be displayed,

followed by this menu:

ORDINARY

DIAMETER

LARGE

L

MG+DIRT

Ø

MG–DIRT.

≠

SMALL

S

[C-5] Press the menu key that corresponds to the tool interference data you want

to set.

- The tool interference data will be displayed at the cursor.

- In the example shown above, press the menu key LARGE L .

The display will then change as follows:

NEXT WORK NO. 123


1 F-MILL 80.A

2 E-MILL 10.A

4 CTR-DR 20.L

0 DRILL 10.

0 DRILL 7.

3 TAP 8.M

4-78

Note:

By repeating procedural steps [C-2] through [C-5], it becomes possible to

assign the desired pocket numbers to all tools whose pocket number display is

0 (undetermined).

However, it is not possible to assign the same pocket number as that which

has already been used on the NEXT display.

After pocket numbers have been assigned to all the required tools on the NEXT

display by one or more of the methods (A), (B), and (C), proceed with the

operations described below.

[4] Press the menu key LAYOUT FINISH .

- This will cause the display status of LAYOUT FINISH to reverse and the

message LAYOUT FINISH ? to present.


- The names of the tools to which pocket numbers have been assigned on the

NEXT display will then be indicated on the CURRENT display in order of

pocket number.

Notes:

1. The display on the NEXT display will remain unchanged.

2. Even if the pocket numbers that have been assigned on the NEXT display

are already used on the CURRENT display, the tool names with the former

will govern and those with the latter will be erased.

Example:

If the data on the CURRENT and NEXT displays is as shown below:



1 F-MILL 80.A 17 1 F-MILL 80.A

2 E-MILL 10.A 18 2 E-MILL 10.A

3 TAP 8. 19 4 CTR-DR 20.

4 CHF-M 20.A 20 5 DRILL 10.

5 21 6 DRILL 7.

6 22 3 TAP 8.

M

M

4-79

Here, if procedural steps [4] and [5] are carried out, the display will change as

follows:



1 F-MILL 80.A 17 1 F-MILL 80.A

2 E-MILL 10.A 18 2 E-MILL 10.A

3 TAP 8. 19 4 CTR-DR 20.

4 CTR-DR 20. 20 5 DRILL 10.

5 DRILL 10. 21 6 DRILL 7.

6 DRILL 7. 22 3 TAP 8.

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

M

M

That is, the tool names with pocket numbers assigned on the NEXT display will

be indicated in order of pocket number on the CURRENT display.

The chamfering cutter with a nominal diameter of 20 mm (0.79 in) that has

been registered under pocket number 4 will be erased automatically (see Note

2 above).

- The reverse-display status of LAYOUT FINISH will be cleared, and the

message LAYOUT FINISH? will be displayed to indicate that all the tool

layout operations have been finished.

Note:

If, after you have pressed LAYOUT FINISH following selection of an intra-

magazine interference data type, tools that are likely to interfere with other tools or

pockets are found, then the layout operation will stop in the middle and the data

display of the tools that are likely to interfere will be highlighted red.

(1) Clearing pocket numbers

If a wrong pocket number has been assigned during tool layout on the NEXT

display, carry out the layout operation once again after resetting all the tool

pocket numbers to 0 using the following procedure.

[1] Press the menu key PKNO. CLEAR .

- This will cause the display status of PKNO. CLEAR to reverse and the

message POCKET NUMBER CLEAR ? to be indicated.


- All the pocket numbers that have been assigned on the NEXT display will be

reset to 0.

- The reverse-display status of PKNO. CLEAR will be released.

4-80

(2) Specifying a spare tool

If the tool data being indicated on the NEXT display includes the data of the

tool which needs a spare tool, it is possible to specify the spare tool on this

display.

[1] Press either the cursor key or to call the cursor on the NEXT

display.

[2] Press either the cursor key or to move the cursor to the PKNO.

data item of the tool which needs a spare tool.

Example:

When the data shown below is indicated on the NEXT display and a spare tool

is to be specified for the end-mill with a nominal diameter of 10 mm (0.39 in):

NEXT WORK NO. 123


1 F-MILL 80.A

2 E-MILL 10.A

3 CTR-DR 20.

4 DRILL 10.

5 DRILL 7.


[3] Press the menu key SPARE T ADDITION .

- This will cause the display status of SPARE T ADDITION to reverse and the

message SPARE TOOL ADDITION <INPUT>? to present.


- The data of a spare tool will be displayed directly under the data of the tool

which needs a spare tool.

- In the example above, the display will change as follows:

NEXT WORK NO. 123


1 F-MILL 80.A

2 E-MILL 10.A

0 E-MILL 10.A

3 CTR-DR 20.

4 DRILL 10.

5 DRILL 7.

- The reverse-display status of SPARE T ADDITION will be released.

4-81

Note:

The pocket number of a spare tool is displayed as 0 (undetermined), as shown

above.

Therefore, a pocket number must be assigned to the spare tool after the above

operation has been carried out.

(3) Erasing spare tool data

Proceed as follows to erase specified spare tool data:

[1] Press either the or cursor key to move the cursor to the PKNO.

item of the spare tool data to be erased.

- First call the cursor on the screen if it is not being indicated on the NEXT

display.

[2] Press the menu key SPARE T ERASE .

- This will cause the display status of SPARE T ERASE to reverse and the

message SPARE TOOL ERASE <INPUT>? to present.


- The spare tool data being indicated on the NEXT display will be erased.

- The reverse-display status of SPARE T ADDITION will be released.

2. Total/partial erasing procedures for registered tool data

All or part of the tool data registered on the CURRENT display of the TOOL

LAYOUT display, (i.e., the tool data that has already been laid out) can be

erased.

(1) Partial erasure of registered tool data

[1] Call up the TOOL LAYOUT display on the screen.

- The names and nominal diameters of the tools which have been registered on

the CURRENT display will then be indicated.

[2] Press the menu selector key (green key located to the right of the menu keys).

- This will present the display of the following menu in the menu display area:

TOOL

SEARCH

TOOL

ERASE

LAYOUT

CANCEL

NEXT

PAGE

[3] Press either the or cursor key to move the cursor to the PKNO.

item of the tool data to be erased.

4-82

Example:

When tools are registered as shown below and the data of the drill with a

nominal diameter of 10 mm (0.39 in) is to be erased:

CURRENT WORK NO. 123


1 F-MILL 80.A 17

2 E-MILL 10.A 18

3 TAP 8. 19

4 CTR-DR 20. 20

5 DRILL 10. 21

6 DRILL 7. 22


M


- This will cause the display of TOOL ERASE to reverse and the message

CURSOR POSITION ERASE <INPUT>? will be displayed.


- The data of the tool indicated by blinking of the cursor will be erased.

- In the example above, the display will change as follows:

CURRENT WORK NO. 123


1 F-MILL 80.A 17

2 E-MILL 10.A 18

3 TAP 8. 19

4 CTR-DR 20. 20

5 21

6 DRILL 7. 22

M

Tool data to have been erased

- The reverse-display status of TOOL ERASE will be released.

The various sets of registered tool data can be erased, one at a time, by repeating

procedural steps [3] through [5] above.

(2) Total erasure of registered tool data

[1] Call up the TOOL LAYOUT display on the screen.


[3] Press the menu key LAYOUT CANCEL .

- This will cause the display status of LAYOUT CANCEL to reverse and the

message LAYOUT CANCEL <–9999 INPUT>? to present.

4-83

[4] Specify -9999 with the numeric keys and then press the input key .

- To specify -9999, press the , , , , , and keys, in this order.

- The entire tool data that has been registered on the CURRENT display will

then be erased.

- In addition, the reverse-display status of LAYOUT CANCEL will be released.

3. Other menu functions and their usage

When the TOOL LAYOUT display is called on the screen, the following menu

will be indicated in the menu display area:


ERASE

PKNO.

CLEAR

PKNO.

SHIFT

PKNO.

ASSIGN

SPARE T

ADDITION

LAYOUT

FINISH

NEXT

PAGE

Depression of the menu selector key (green key located to the right of the

menu keys) changes the above menu over to the following menu:

TOOL

SEARCH

TOOL

ERASE

LAYOUT

CANCEL

CURRENT

PAGE

These menu items include those which have not been described in the section

of display operations 1. or 2. above. The functions and usage of such menu

data are described below.

(1) TOOL SEARCH

This menu data should be used to search for a tool name that is registered

on the CURRENT display.

The operating procedure is similar to that used for TOOL SEARCH of the

TOOL DATA display. For details, see the description of display operations

5.-(2), TOOL SEARCH , of section 4-6 TOOL DATA Display .

(2) NEXT PAGE

On the NEXT display, up to 32 sets of tool data can be indicated per page.

If the total number of tools to be used under the specified program exceeds

32, then the NEXT display also will have two pages or more. If the NEXT

display consists of two pages or more, the particular page can be changed

over to the next one by pressing the menu key NEXT PAGE.

(3) CURRENT PAGE

On the CURRENT display, up to 32 sets of tool data can be indicated per

page. Data having pocket number 33 onwards will be indicated on the

second and subsequent pages of the CURRENT display. Depression of the

menu key CURRENT PAGE changes the particular page of the CURRENT

display over to the next page.

4-84

4-8 PARAMETER Display

Function:

- This display is used to see the contents of parameters that have already been set

or to change parameters.

- User parameters and cutting condition parameters can be set on this display.

Data of the CUT COND. PARAM display:

M3S027

CUTTING

COND

USER MACHINE PREVIOUS

PAGE

NEXT

PAGE

* * * CUT COND. PARAM * * *

MATERIAL STANDARD DRILL REAMER TAP BOR BAR MILL CUT

MAT.-1 ÆÆ ******** C-SP (%)FR (%)

MAT.-2 ÆÆ ******** C-SP (%)FR (%)

MAT.-3 ÆÆ ******** C-SP (%)FR (%)

MAT.-4 ÆÆ ******** C-SP (%)FR (%)

MAT.-5 ÆÆ ******** C-SP (%)FR (%)

MAT.-6 ÆÆ ******** C-SP (%)FR (%)

MAT.-7 ÆÆ ******** C-SP (%)FR (%)

MAT.-8 ÆÆ ******** C-SP (%)FR (%)

( )

Note:

The above display is one on which parameters and cutting conditions are

prestored.

Parameters refer to various types of information, such as the machine constants

and other data necessary for numerical control of machines, data necessary to

cutting, etc.

The PARAMETER display contains prestored parameters. In the MAZATROL M-32,

the PARAMETER display is divided into 19 types of PARAMETER subdisplays as

shown below.

4-85

CUT COND. PARAM

CUT COND. PARAM NO.1



POINT CUTTING PARAMETER

LINE/FACE/3-D CUTTING PAR

USER PARAMETER NO.1

USER PARAMETER NO.2

USER PARAMETER NO.3

USER PARAMETER NO.4

MACH CONSTANT PAR NO.1








PITCH ERROR COMP PAR.

Types of

PARA-

METER

sub-displays

—

“

”

‘

—

“

”

‘

’

÷

—

“

”

‘

’

÷

◊

ÿ

Ÿ

For cutting-condition parameters:

Various parameters associated with

cutting conditions are prestored.

For user parameters:

User parameters, as well as various

parameters associated with cutting

conditions, are prestored.

For machine parameters:

Constants and other data that are

peculiar to machines are prestored.

The available types of parameters and their setting procedures are described in

detail in the separate volume Parameter List. Here, only the procedure of recalling

each PARAMETER subdisplays is described.

Procedure for calling up each PARAMETER subdisplay:

1. When the PARAMETER display has been changed over from another display,

the CUT COND. PARAM subdisplay is indicated with the following menu:

CUTTING

COND

USER MACHINE PREVIOUS

PAGE

NEXT

PAGE

(1) Each time the menu key NEXT PAGE is pressed, subdisplays for cutting-

conditions/parameters will change over in order of — Æ “ Æ ” Æ ‘ Æ

— Æ “ . . . . .

4-86

(2) Each time the menu key PREVIOUS PAGE is pressed, subdisplays for

cutting-conditions/parameters will change over in order of — Æ ‘ Æ ” Æ

“ Æ — Æ ‘ . . . . .

2. When the menu key USER is pressed, the POINT CUTTING PARAMETER

subdisplay will be indicated.

(1) Each time the menu key NEXT PAGE is pressed, subdisplays for user

parameters will change over in order of — Æ “ Æ ” Æ . . . . . Æ ÷ Æ —

Æ “ . . . . .


user parameters will change over in order of — Æ ÷ Æ ’ Æ . . . . . Æ “

Æ — Æ ÷ . . . . .

3. When the menu key MACHINE is pressed, the MACH CONSTANT PAR NO.

1 subdisplay will be indicated.

(1) Each time the menu key NEXT PAGE is pressed, subdisplays for

machine parameters will change over in order of — Æ “ Æ ” Æ . . . . . Æ

Ÿ Æ — Æ “ . . . . .


machine parameters will change over in order of — Æ Ÿ Æ ÿ Æ . . . . . Æ

“ Æ — Æ Ÿ . . . . .

4. When the menu key CUTTING COND is pressed on each PARAMETER

subdisplay, the CUT COND. PARAM subdisplay will be indicated.

4-9 DATA IN/OUT Display

Function:

The DATA IN/OUT display is used to transfer the data prestored within the NC

equipment to an external unit or to transfer the data prestored within an external

unit to the NC equipment.

In the MAZATROL M-32, three types of DATA IN/OUT displays are available

according to the external unit to or from which data is to be transferred.

1. DATA IN/OUT (CMT) display

This display should be called when transferring data between the NC

equipment and a cassette tape unit or a microdisk unit.

2. DATA IN/OUT (DNC) display (Option)


equipment and a host CPU (central processing unit) or external NC equipment.

3. DATA IN/OUT (TAPE) display


equipment and a tape reader/puncher or a microdisk unit.

4-87

Note:

In this manual, the procedure for data transfer between the NC equipment and a

microdisk unit is not described. For details of this procedure, refer to the Operating

manual that accompanies your microdisk unit.

Procedure for calling up each DATA IN/OUT display:

First press the display selector key (green key located to the left of the menu

keys).

This will cause the following menu to display:

POSITION COMMAND TRACE PROGRAM TOOL

FILE

TOOL

DATA

TOOL

LAYOUT

PAR DATA

I/O

Here, press the menu key DATA I/O . The following menu will then be displayed:

CMT I/O DNC I/O TAPE I/O I/O STOP

- To call the DATA IN/OUT (CMT) display, press the menu key CMT I/O.

- To call the DATA IN/OUT (DNC) display, press the menu key DNC I/O.

- To call the DATA IN/OUT (TAPE) display, press the menu key TAPE I/O.

General notes on data transfer:

1. The machining programs that have been created on the MAZATROL CAM M-1

(only Version L or its successors) or M-2 can be loaded into the MAZATROL

M-32. In that case, M1 or M2 programs will be automatically converted into M-

32 programs and then stored into the MAZATROL M-32. During program

loading, the message M2 PROGRAM BEING READ will be displayed on the

screen. (For further details, see display data portion ⁄ on the DATA IN/OUT

(CMT) or DATA IN/OUT (DNC) display.)

Data other than that of machining programs, however, cannot be loaded into

the MAZATROL M-32, and neither can COMPARE operations be carried out.

Data that is saved within Version K or predecessors of the M-1 must be loaded

into the M-2 first and then loaded into the M-32.

2. The machining programs that have been created on the MAZATROL M-32

cannot be loaded into MAZATROL CAM M-1 or M-2.

3. If the parameters that are saved within Version B or predecessors of the

MAZATROL M-32 are loaded, then the message 514 DESIGNATED DATA

NOT COINCIDENT will be displayed, which you can disregard.

Parameters that are saved within Version C or its successors cannot be loaded

into Version B or its predecessors.

4-88

4-9-1 DATA IN/OUT (CMT) display

Function:

This display is used to store onto a cassette magnetic tape (CMT) the contents of

the machining programs or other data prestored within the memory of the NC

equipment, or to read the data prestored on a cassette tape into the memory of the

NC equipment.

On this display, the following operations can be carried out:

1. LOAD

Operation in which data is transferred from a cassette tape to the NC

equipment

2. SAVE

Operation in which data is transferred from the NC equipment to a cassette

tape

3. COMPARE

Operation in which comparison is made between the data prestored within the

NC equipment and the data preserved on a cassette tape

4. DIRECTORY

Operation in which the DATA IN/OUT display is indicated to check what type

of data is prestored on a cassette tape

4-89

Data of the DATA IN/OUT (CMT) display:

M3S028

NO.123456789

10111213141516

WORK NO. BLOCK99999

COMMENT* *a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

9999 M

E

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

—

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

“

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

”

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

CMT I/O

MODE ‘ (********)

WORK NO. ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )( ) ( ) ( ) ( )( ) ( ) ( ) ( )( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

’

TOOL DATA ÷ ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

TOOL FILE ◊ ( )

PARAMETER ÿ ( )

EIA/ISO INFOR Ÿ ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

⁄

a a a a a a a a a a a a



PAGE 1/16

LOAD

CMTÆNC

SAVE

NCÆCMT

COMPARE

NC=CMT

DIRECT

CMTÆNC

* * * DATA IN OUT (CMT) * * *( )

Note:




— WORK NO. Workpiece number of the program prestored within the NC

equipment

Program identification code

: MAZATROL program

: EIA/ISO program

“ BLOCK Number of blocks that have been used during program execution- For MAZATROL programs, one line is calculated as one

block.- For EIA/ISO programs, 50 characters are calculated as one

block.

” COMMENT Program name

‘ MODE Data transfer mode (LOAD, SAVE, COMPARE, or

DIRECTORY)

’ WORK NO. Workpiece number of the program to be transferred

÷ TOOL DATA Transfer/no transfer of the tool data registered on the TOOL

DATA display- Either 1 (transfer) or 0 (no transfer) is displayed in

parentheses.- Under drum change specifications (option), the four sets of

parentheses correspond to drum No.1, drum No.2, drum No.3,and drum No.4, respectively, from the left.

—

M E

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

orM

E

4-90


◊ TOOL FILE Transfer/no transfer of the tool data registered on the TOOL FILE

display

- Either 1 (transfer) or 0 (no transfer) is displayed in parentheses.

ÿ PARAMETER Transfer/no transfer of parameters

- Either 1 (transfer) or 0 (no transfer) is displayed in parentheses.

Ÿ EIA/ISO INFOR Transfer/no transfer of EIA/ISO information

- Transfer/no transfer of tool offset data is indicated by either 1

(transfer) or 0 (no transfer), respectively, in the leftmost

parentheses.

- Transfer/no transfer of work offset data is indicated by either 1

(transfer) or 0 (no transfer), respectively, in the parentheses

second from the left.

- Transfer/no transfer of macrovariables is indicated by either 1

(transfer) or 0 (no transfer), respectively, in the parentheses third

from the left.

- Transfer/no transfer of tool-life control data is indicated by either 1

(transfer) or 0 (no transfer), respectively, in the rightmost

parentheses.

⁄ The message M2 PROGRAM BEING READ? is displayed in this

position while the NC equipment is reading the M1 or M2 program.

Display operations:

1. LOAD operation

Proceed as follows to transfer data from a cassette tape to the NC equipment:

[1] Set onto the cassette deck the cassette tape to be loaded.

[2] Call the DATA IN/OUT (CMT) display on the screen.

- This will cause the following menu to display in the menu display area:

LOAD

CMTÆ MC

SAVE

NCÆCMT

COMPARE

NC=CMT

DIRECT

CMTÆNC

[3] Press the menu key LOAD CMT Æ NC.

- LOAD will then be displayed in the position of the MODE item (data portion

‘).

- The following menu will be displayed in the menu display area:

PROGRAM TOOL

DATA

TOOL

FILE

PAR EIA/ISO

INFOR.

INPUT

CANCEL

PREVIOUS

PAGE

NEXT

PAGE

START

- The cursor will appear in the upper leftmost parentheses of the WORK NO.

item (data portion ’).

[4] Input the data to be loaded.

(1) If the cursor is blinking in the position of the WORK NO. item (data portion

’), the message WORK NO.? will be displayed. In that case, specify the

workpiece number of the program to be loaded and then press the input

key .

4-91

(2) If the cursor is blinking in the position of the TOOL DATA item (data

portion ÷), the message CMT I/O <Y:1, N:0>? will be displayed. In that

case, press the and keys, in that order, if the tool data is to be

loaded. If the machine has a drum change function, then the four sets of

parentheses correspond to drum No.1, drum No.2, drum No.3, and drum

No.4, respectively, from the left.

(3) The message CMT I/O <Y:1, N:0>? will also be displayed if the cursor is

blinking in the position of the TOOL FILE item (data portion ◊) or

PARAMETER item (data portion ÿ). In that case, press the and

keys, in that order, if the tool file data or parameter data is to be

loaded.

(4) If the cursor is blinking in the leftmost parentheses of the position of the

EIA/ISO INFOR item (data portion Ÿ), then the message TOOL OFFSET

<Y:1, N:0>? will be displayed. In that case, press the and keys, in that order, if the tool offset data is to be loaded. If the cursor is

blinking in the parentheses second from the left, then the message WORK

OFFSET <Y:1, N:0>? will be displayed. In that case, press the and

keys, in that order, if the work offset data is to be loaded.

If the cursor is blinking in the parentheses third from the left, then the

message MACRO VARIABLE <Y:1, N:0>? will be displayed. In that case,

press the and keys, in that order, if the macrovariable(s) is to

be loaded.

If the cursor is blinking in the rightmost parentheses, the message TOOL

LIFE CONTROL <Y:1, N:0>? will be displayed. In that case, press the

and keys, in that order, if the tool-life control data is to be

loaded.

- For data items that do not need to be loaded, press the appropriate cursor

key to skip to the next item.

- The cursor must be moved in the following order:

WORK NO. (—) (“) (”) (‘)

(’) (÷) (◊) (ÿ)

(Ÿ) (⁄) ( ) ( )

( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

TOOL DATA ( ) ( ’) ( ”) ( ’’’)

TOOL FILE ( )

PARAMETER ( ) ( ’)

EIA/ISO INFOR ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

4-92

- Each time the or cursor key is pressed, the cursor moves in

order of —Æ “ Æ ” ..... Æ Æ Æ Æ ..... Æ .

- If, however, a drum change function (option) is provided in the particular

machine, then the cursor will move in order of —Æ “ Æ ” ..... Æ Æ

Æ ’ Æ ” Æ ’’’ Æ Æ ..... Æ .

- Each time the or cursor key is pressed, the cursor moves in

a reverse order to that mentioned above.

- If the menu key TOOL DATA is pressed, the cursor will jump to the

position of .

- If the menu key TOOL FILE is pressed, the cursor will jump to the

position of .

- If the menu key PAR is pressed, the cursor will jump to the position of .

- If the menu key EIA/ISO INFOR. is pressed, the cursor will jump to the

position of .

- If the menu key PROGRAM is pressed, the cursor will return to the

position of —.

- The cursor will continue moving through the position of each data item as

long as data input is made in sequence.

- The input data will be displayed in the parentheses of each item.

(5) Press the menu key START.

- The display status of the START will reverse and data transfer will begin.

- The cursor will blink in the position of the data being transferred.

- After data transfer, the reverse-display status of START will be released.

2. SAVE operation

Proceed as follows to transfer data from the NC equipment to a cassette tape:

[1] Set a cassette tape on the cassette deck.

[2] Call up the DATA IN/OUT (CMT) display on the screen.

[3] Press the menu key SAVE NC Æ CMT.

[4] Input the data to be saved.

- To make this input, use a similar procedural step to [4] of LOAD operation

above.

[5] Press the menu key START.

- The display status of START will reverse and data transfer will begin.

- The cursor will blink in the position of the data being transferred.


4-93

3. COMPARE operation

Proceed as follows to compare the data prestored within the NC equipment and

that recorded on a cassette tape:

[1] Set onto the cassette deck the cassette tape which contains the data to be

compared.

[2] Call the DATA IN/OUT (CMT) display on the screen.

[3] Press the menu key COMPARE NC = CMT.

[4] Input the data to be compared.


above.


- The display status of START will reverse and data comparison will begin.

- The cursor will blink in the position of the data being compared.

- When the reverse-display status of START is released, this indicates

coincidence between the two sets of data that have been compared.

- If an error has been found to exist in the data being compared, the alarm

message DATA ARE NOT COINCIDENT will be displayed and the

comparison operation aborted. That is, the data in the position where the

cursor is blinking is different from the data prestored within the NC equipment.

4. Precautions on LOAD, SAVE, and COMPARE operations:

(1) The maximum number of programs that can be transferred at one time is 16.

(2) In the procedural step [4] of a LOAD operation, the alarm message 433 SAME

PROGRAM IS DESIGNATED may be displayed if the same workpiece number

as that prestored within the NC equipment is designated. If this is the case,

then the workpiece number prestored within the NC equipment must be

changed. (See the description of “Changing a workpiece number” (screen

operation 1.) in PROGRAM FILE display , section 4-4-2.)

However, even if the workpiece number of the program to be loaded agrees

with that of a program existing in the memory of the NC equipment, the alarm

mentioned above will not occur when the value of bit 1 of parameter G9 is 1.

In this case, the corresponding program within the NC equipment will be erased

and the loaded program will be registered under that workpiece number.

Before executing this function, therefore, check if the corresponding program

within the NC equipment is an unnecessary one. (Execution of this function

erases the program within the NC equipment first.)

(3) Data transfer will not be interrupted even if the display is changed over to

another after data transfer has started. Modifying the data being transferred,

however, is not possible.

5. The entire data that has been input can be erased using the following

procedure:

4-94

[1] Press the menu key INPUT CANCEL .

- The message ERASE <INPUT>? will then be displayed.


- Values in all parentheses will become 0.

This procedure is therefore useful when re-designating the data to be transferred.

6. How to abort data transfer

Proceed as follows to abort the particular data transfer operation:

[1] Press the menu selector key (green key located to the right of the menu keys)

to display the following menu on the screen:

CMT

I/O

DNC

I/O

TAPE

I/O

I/O

STOP

- If the DATA IN/OUT display is on the screen, depression of the menu

selector key once or twice causes this menu to present.

[2] Press the menu key I/O STOP.

- The data transfer operation will then be aborted.

If data transfer has been aborted, the transfer operation cannot be restarted from

that program position; it must be restarted from the beginning by repeating the

LOAD, SAVE, or COMPARE operation.

7. DIRECTORY operation

In order to check what type of data is preserved on a cassette tape, the data

can be indicated on the DATA IN/OUT (CMT) display. The operating

procedure is described below.

[1] Set onto the cassette deck the cassette tape whose data is to be checked.

[2] Call up the DATA IN/OUT (CMT) display on the screen.

[3] Press the menu key DIRECT CMT Æ NC.


- The display status of START will reverse and the data recorded on the

cassette tape will be indicated in parentheses on the display.

- After display of the entire data, the reverse-display status of START will be

released.

4-95

Notes:

1. The maximum number of programs whose contents can be indicated at one

time is 16.

2. A LOAD or COMPARE operation can be carried out after the data recorded on

a cassette tape has been indicated on the DATA IN/OUT (CMT) display by a

DIRECTORY operation. Therefore, this method becomes effective especially

when loading or comparing the entire data recorded on a cassette tape.

Example 1:

When loading the entire data that has been indicated on the DATA IN/OUT (CMT)

display by a DIRECTORY operation:



- The entire data being indicated on the DATA IN/OUT (CMT) display will then

be transferred to the NC equipment.

Example 2:

When loading a part of the data which has been indicated on the DATA IN/OUT

(CMT) display by a DIRECTORY operation:


[2] Move the cursor to the position in which data that is not to be loaded is being

displayed.

[3] Specify 0 with the appropriate numeric key, and then press the input key .


- All data will then be transferred to the NC equipment, with the exception of 0

that has been input in procedural step [2] and [3] above.

Use of a similar procedure to that of example 1 or example 2 above makes it

possible to carry out a COMPARE operation on all or part of the data which is

currently being indicated on the DATA IN/OUT (CMT) display.

8. Functions of other menu data

The left half portion of the DATA IN/OUT (CMT) display indicates workpiece

numbers and other data of the programs prestored within the NC equipment.

- Pressing the menu key NEXT PAGE changes the current page of the display

in this portion over to the next page.

- Pressing the menu key PREVIOUS PAGE changes the current page of the

display in this portion over to the preceding page.

4-96

- NOTE -

(4-97)

4-9-2 DATA IN/OUT (DNC) display (Option)

Function:

This display is used to transfer the contents of the machining programs or other

various types of data prestored within the NC equipment of the MAZATROL M-32

to a host CPU or external NC equipment, or to read the data prestored within a

host CPU or external NC equipment into the NC equipment of the MAZATROL M-

32. On this screen, the following operations can be carried out:

1. LOAD

Operation in which data is transferred from a host CPU (or external NC

equipment) to the NC equipment

2. SAVE

Operation in which data is transferred from the NC equipment to a host CPU

(or external NC equipment)

Data of the DATA IN/OUT (DNC) display:

M3S029

NO.123456789

10111213141516

WORK NO. BLOCK99999

COMMENT* *9999 M

E

—

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

“

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

”

DNC I/O

MODE ‘ (********)

WORK NO. ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )( ) ( ) ( ) ( )( ) ( ) ( ) ( )( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

’

TOOL DATA ÷ ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

TOOL FILE ◊ ( )

PARAMETER ÿ ( )

EIA/ISO INFOR Ÿ ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

⁄

PAGE 1/16

LOAD

HOST ÆNC

SAVE

NCÆ HOST

* * * DATA IN OUT (DNC) * * *( )

Note:


4-98




equipment.


: MAZATROL program

: EIA/ISO program

“ BLOCK Number of blocks that have been used during program execution

- For MAZATROL programs, one line is calculated as one

block.

- For EIA/ISO programs, 50 characters are calculated as one

block.


‘ MODE Data transfer mode (LOAD or SAVE)


÷ TOOL DATA File number of the tool data to be transferred

- For machines not provided with a drum change function, data

can be input only in the leftmost parentheses.

◊ TOOL FILE File number of the tool file data to be transferred

ÿ PARAMETER File number of the parameter(s) to be transferred

Ÿ EIA/ISO INFOR File number of each set of data related to EIA/ISO information

- In the leftmost parentheses:

File number of the tool offset data to be transferred.

- In the parentheses second from the left:

File number of the work offset data to be transferred.

- In the parentheses third from the left:

File number of the macrovariable(s) to be transferred.

- In the rightmost parentheses:

File number of the tool-life control data to be transferred.

⁄ The message M2 PROGRAM BEING READ ? is displayed in

this position while the NC equipment is reading the M1 or M2

program.

—

M EorM

E

Display operations:

1. LOAD operation

Proceed as follows to transfer data from a host CPU (or external NC

equipment) to the NC equipment:

[1] Call up the DATA IN/OUT (DNC) display on the screen.


LOAD

HOST Æ NC

SAVE

NCÆHOST

4-99

[2] Press the menu key LOAD HOST Æ NC.


‘).

- The following menu will be displayed in the menu display area:

PROGRAM TOOL

DATA

TOOL

FILE

PAR EIA/ISO

INFOR.

INPUT

CANCEL

PREVIOUS

PAGE

NEXT

PAGE

START


item (data portion ’).

[3] Input the data to be loaded.

(1) If the cursor is blinking in the position of the WORK NO. item (data portion

’), the message WORK PIECE PROGRAM NUMBER? will be displayed.

In that case, specify the workpiece number of the program to be loaded

and then press the input key .

(2) If the cursor is blinking in the position of either the TOOL DATA item (data

portion ÷), TOOL FILE item (data portion ◊), or PARAMETER item (data

portion ÿ), then the message FILE NO.? will be displayed. In that case,

specify the file number of the data to be loaded and then press the input

key .

(3) If the cursor is blinking in the leftmost parentheses of the position of the

EIA/ISO INFOR item (data portion Ÿ), then the message TOOL OFFSET

FILE NO.? will be displayed. In that case, if the tool offset data is to be

loaded, specify the corresponding file number with the appropriate numeric

key(s) and then press the input key .

If the cursor is blinking in the parentheses second from the left, then the

message WORK OFFSET FILE NO.? will be displayed. In that case, if the

work offset data is to be loaded, specify the corresponding file number with

the appropriate numeric key(s) and then press the input key .

If the cursor is blinking in the parentheses third from the left, then the

message MACRO VARIABLE FILE NO.? will be displayed. In that case, if

the macrovariable(s) is to be loaded, specify the corresponding file number

with appropriate numeric key(s) and press the input key .

If the cursor is blinking in the rightmost parentheses, then the message

TOOL LIFE CONTROL FILE NO.? will be displayed. In that case, if the

tool-life control data is to be loaded, specify the corresponding file number

with appropriate numeric key(s) and then press the input key

.

4-100

- The input workpiece number or file number will be displayed in the position

where the cursor was blinking.

- For details of the cursor movement procedure, see the description of LOAD

operation (screen operation 1.) in section 4-9-1 DATA IN/OUT (CMT)

display .

- The cursor will automatically move to the next data item as long as data input

is made in sequence.



- The cursor will blink in the position of the data being transferred.- After data transfer, the reverse-display status of START will be released.

2. SAVE operation

Proceed as follows to transfer data from the NC equipment to a host CPU (or

external NC equipment):

[1] Call up the DATA IN/OUT (DNC) display on the screen.

[2] Press the menu key SAVE NC Æ HOST.

[3] Input the data to be saved.


above.



-The cursor will blink in the position of the data being transferred.


3. Precautions on LOAD and SAVE operations:

(1) The maximum number of programs whose contents can be transferred at one

time is 16. However, a larger volume of data than the memory capacity of the

source device cannot be transferred.

(2) If the programs to be transferred include programs whose workpiece numbers

overlap those of the program prestored within the memory of the destination

device, then such programs cannot be transferred. In such cases, change the

workpiece number of the program prestored within the memory of either one of

the two devices. (See the description of screen operation 1. in section 4-4-2

PROGRAM FILE display .)

Similarly, if the data to be transferred includes values that are assigned the

same file number as the data prestored within the memory of the destination

device, then those values cannot be transferred.

4-101

(3) If the entire data that has been input in procedural step [3] of a LOAD or SAVE

operation is to be erased, first press the menu key INPUT CANCEL and then

press the input key . All the input values will then become 0.

(4) Data transfer still continues to be performed through to completion even if the

DATA IN/OUT display has been changed over to another display during

execution of the data transfer operation. However, the data being transferred

cannot be overridden with new data.

(5) If the data transfer operation being performed is to be aborted, press the menu

key I/O STOP. For further details, see the description of “How to abort data

transfer” in section 4-9-1 DATA IN/OUT (CMT) display.

If data transfer has been aborted, the transfer operation cannot be restarted

from that program position; it must be restarted from the beginning, irrespective

of whether the particular operation is LOAD or SAVE. In addition, when data

transfer is currently in progress under commands from external equipment, the

transfer operation cannot be aborted even if the menu key I/O STOP is

pressed.

(6) Pressing the menu key NEXT PAGE causes the current page of the display in

the left half portion of the screen (workpiece numbers and other data prestored

within the NC equipment are displayed in this portion) to change over to the

next page.

Pressing the menu key PREVIOUS PAGE causes the current page to change

back to the preceding page.

4-9-3 DATA IN/OUT (TAPE) display

Function:

This display is used to preserve the EIA/ISO programs prestored within the NC

equipment onto paper tape or to read the EIA/ISO programs previously punched on

paper tape into the NC equipment.

On this display, the following operations can be carried out:

1. LOAD

Operation in which a program punched on paper tape is transferred to the NC

equipment

2. ALL LOAD

Operation in which all the programs punched on paper tape are transferred to

the NC equipment

3. PUNCH

Operation in which a program prestored within the NC equipment is output onto

paper tape

4-102

4. ALL PUNCH

Operation in which all the programs prestored within the NC equipment are

output onto paper tape

5. COMPARE

Operation in which comparison is made between a program prestored within

the NC equipment and a program punched on paper tape

6. ALL COMPARE

Operation in which comparison is made between all the programs prestored

within the NC equipment and all those punched on paper tape

7. TAPE SEARCH

Operation in which the data punched on paper tape is searched for a specific

character string(s)

8. REWIND (Option)

Operation in which paper tape is rewound

Note:

Data that can be transferred using this display is that of the EIA/ISO programs only.

4-103

Data of the DATA IN/OUT (TAPE) display:

M3S030

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

NO.123456789

10111213141516

a a a a a a a a a a a a a














































WORK NO. BLOCK99999

COMMENT* *9999 M

E

—

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

“

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

”

TAPE I/O

MODE ‘ (********)

WORK NO. ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )( ) ( ) ( ) ( )( ) ( ) ( ) ( )( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

’

. .

. .÷TAPE

. .

. .◊

SEARCH DATA





PAGE 1/16

LOAD

TAPEÆNC

ALL LOAD

TAPEÆNC

PUNCH

NC Æ TAPE

ALL PUNCH

NC Æ TAPE

COMPARE

NC=TAPE

ALL COM.

NC=TAPE

TAPE

SEARCH

REWIND

* * * DATA IN OUT (TAPE) * * *( )

Note:





equipment


: MAZATROL program

: EIA/ISO program

“ BLOCK Number of blocks that have been used during program execution

- For MAZATROL programs, one line is calculated as one

block.

- For EIA/ISO programs, 50 characters are calculated as one

block.


‘ MODE Data transfer mode (LOAD, ALL LOAD, PUNCH, ALL PUNCH,

COMPARE, ALL COMPARE, TAPE SEARCH, or REWIND)


÷ TAPE Data that has been searched for by the NC equipment in the

TAPE SEARCH mode will be displayed in this position.

◊ SEARCH DATA The data to be searched for in the TAPE SEARCH mode will be

displayed in this position.

—

M EorM

E

4-104

Display operations:

1. LOAD operation

Proceed as follows to transfer an EIA/ISO program punched on paper tape to

the NC equipment:

[1] Set onto the paper tape reader the paper tape containing the program to be

loaded.

[2] Call the DATA IN/OUT (TAPE) display on the screen.


LOAD

TAPEÆ NC

ALL LOAD

TAPEÆNC

PUNCH

NCÆTAPE

ALL PUNCH

NCÆTAPE

COMPARE

NC=TAPE

ALL COM.

NC=TAPE

TAPE

SEARCH

REWIND

[3] Press the menu key LOAD TAPE Æ NC.


‘).

- The following manu will be displayed in the menu display area:

INPUT

CANCEL

PREVIOUS

PAGE

NEXT

PAGE

START


item (data portion ’), then the message WORK PIECE PROGRAM

NUMBER.? will be displayed.


program to be loaded. Then, press the input key .

- The input workpiece number will be displayed and the cursor will move into

the next parentheses (on the right) of that item.

- Likewise, input the workpiece numbers of all the programs to be loaded.

Example:

When loading the programs having workpiece number 10, 11, and 12:

Press the , , , , , , , , and keys, in that order.

- Up to 16 workpiece numbers can be input.

- It is not possible to input the same workpiece number as that prestored within

the NC equipment. If a program with the same workpiece number as that

prestored within the NC equipment is to be loaded, then the corresponding

workpiece number prestored within the memory of the NC equipment must be

changed. (For details of the changing procedure, see the description of

screen operation 1. in section 4-4-2 PROGRAM FILE display .)

4-105



- The cursor will blink in the position of the workpiece number of the program

being transferred.


2. ALL LOAD operation

Proceed as follows to transfer all EIA/ISO programs punched on paper tape to

the NC equipment:

[1] Set onto the paper tape reader the paper tape containing the programs to be

loaded.

[2] Call up the DATA IN/OUT (TAPE) display on the screen.

[3] Press the menu key ALL LOAD TAPE Æ NC.


- The display status of START will be reversed and data transfer will begin.


3. PUNCH operation

Proceed as follows to output an EIA/ISO program prestored within the NC

equipment onto paper tape:

[1] Set paper tape onto the tape puncher.

[2] Call the DATA IN/OUT (TAPE) display on the screen.

[3] Press the menu key PUNCH NC Æ TAPE.


program to be output. Then, press the input key .



- Likewise, input the workpiece numbers of all the programs to be output.



- The display status of START will be reversed and the tape puncher will be

operated.


whose contents are currently being punched.

- After punching of specified program, the reverse-display status of START will

be released.

4-106

4. ALL PUNCH operation

Proceed as follows to output all EIA/ISO programs prestored within the NC

equipment onto paper tape:

[1] Set paper tape onto the tape puncher.


[3] Press the menu key ALL PUNCH NC Æ TAPE.



operated.

- After punching of all the programs, the reverse-display status of START will

be released.

5. COMPARE operation

Proceed as follows to compare the contents of an EIA/ISO program prestored

within the NC equipment and those of a program recorded on paper tape:

[1] Set onto the paper tape reader the paper tape which contains the program to

be compared.


[3] Press the menu key COMPARE NC=TAPE .


program to be compared. Then, press the input key .



- Likewise, input the workpiece numbers of all the programs to be compared.



- The display status of START will reverse and comparison between the

specified program (program prestored within the memory of the NC

equipment) and the program recorded on paper tape will begin.


being compared.


coincidence in contents between the two programs that have been compared.

4-107

- If, during this comparison, the two programs are found not to be coincident in

contents, the alarm message DATA ARE NOT COINCIDENT will be

displayed and the comparison operation will be aborted.

6. ALL COMPARE operation

Proceed as follows to compare in contents all the EIA/ISO programs prestored

within the NC equipment and all those recorded on paper tape:

[1] Set onto the paper tape reader the paper tape which contains the programs to

be compared.


[3] Press the menu key ALL COM. NC=TAPE .


- The display status of START will be reversed, and comparison between all

EIA/ISO programs prestored within the memory of the NC equipment and all

those recorded on paper tape will begin.


coincidence in contents between all the EIA/ISO programs prestored within

the NC equipment and all those recorded on paper tape that have been

compared.

- If, during this comparison, the programs are found not to be coincident in

contents, the alarm message DATA ARE NOT COINCIDENT will be

displayed and the comparison operation will be aborted.

7. Precautions on data transfer

(1) To erase all workpiece numbers that have been input in procedural step [4] of

a LOAD, PUNCH, or COMPARE operation, first press the menu key INPUT

CANCEL and then press the input key . With this method, it becomes

possible to restart a workpiece-number input procedure from the beginning.

(2) Data transfer still continues to be performed through to completion even if the

DATA IN/OUT (TAPE) display has been changed over to another display

during execution of the data transfer operation. However, the data being

transferred cannot be overridden with new data.

(3) To abort data transfer, press the menu key I/O STOP. If the DATA IN/OUT

(TAPE) display is on the screen, depression of the menu selector key (green

key located to the right of the menu keys) once or twice will cause I/O STOP

to be displayed at the right corner of the menu display area.

If data transfer has been aborted, the transfer operation cannot be restarted

from that program position; it must be restarted from the beginning, irrespective

of the type of operation (LOAD, ALL LOAD, PUNCH, ALL PUNCH, COMPARE,

or ALL COMPARE).

4-108

(4) The left half portion of the DATA IN/OUT (TAPE) display indicates workpiece

numbers and other data of the programs prestored within the NC equipment.

Pressing the menu key NEXT PAGE changes the current page of the display in

this portion over to the next page.

Pressing the menu key PREVIOUS PAGE changes the current page of the

display in this portion over to the preceding page.

(5) During step [4] of LOAD operation, when the value of bit 1 of parameter G9 is

1, alarm will not occur even if the workpiece number of the program to be

loaded agrees with that of a program existing in the memory of the NC

equipment. In this case, the corresponding program within the NC equipment

will be erased and the loaded program will be registered under that workpiece

number. Before executing this function, therefore, check if the corresponding

program within the NC equipment is an unnecessary one. (Execution of this

function erases the program within the NC equipment first.)

(6) During ALL LOAD operation, the alarm message 536 SAME PROGRAM

APPOINT may be displayed if the same workpiece number as that prestored

within the NC equipment is designated. If this is the case, then the workpiece

number prestored within the NC equipment must be changed. (See the

description of “Changing a workpiece number” (screen operation 1.) in

PROGRAM FILE display , section 4-4-2.)

However, even if the work number of the program to be loaded agrees with that

of a program existing in the memory of the NC equipment, the alarm mentioned

above will not occur when the value of bit 1 of parameter G9 is 1. In this case,

the corresponding program within the NC equipment will be erased and the

loaded program will be registered under that workpiece number. Before

executing this function, therefore, check if the corresponding program within

the NC equipment is an unnecessary one. (Execution of this function erases

the program within the NC equipment first).

8. TAPE SEARCH operation

A specific character string(s) can be located from among the data recorded on

paper tape by carrying out the procedural steps described below.

[1] Set onto the paper tape reader the paper tape which contains the character

string(s) to be searched for.


4-109

[3] Press the menu key TAPE SEARCH .


G X Y Z F M SP EOB SHIFT. . . . . . .

- Each time the menu key SHIFT is pressed, the menu display changes in

order of ..... as shown below.

N I J K R S T E SHIFT. . . . . . .

/ A B C P L D H SHIFT. . . . . . .

O U V W Q INS ( ) SHIFT. . . . . . .

- The message SEARCH DATA <START>? will be displayed.

[4] Select the necessary characters from menus through , and using the

appropriate menu key and numeric keys, specify the character string(s) to be

searched for.

Example:

When searching for the character string X100:

Press X, , , and , in that order.

Menu key

Numeric keys

- The specified character string will then be displayed in the position of the

SEARCH DATA item (data portion ◊).

- To cancel the entire character string, press the data cancellation key .

- To cancel only the last character that has been specified, press the clear key

.



SET

END

MACRO

INPUT

Note:

In procedural step [4] above, press the menu key MACRO INPUT if a

character string for macrovariable input is to be located.

4-110

[6] Press the menu key SET END.


INPUT

CANCEL

PREVIOUS

PAGE

NEXT

PAGE

START


- This will cause the display status of [START] to reverse and the NC

equipment to start searching the paper tape for the character string which has

been specified in procedural step [4] above.

- If the corresponding character string is found, then the data containing that

character string will be displayed in the position of the TAPE item (data

portion ÷). At the same time, the reverse-display status of START will be

released.

Example:

If the character string X100 is found:G01X100.Y100.F10;TAPE:

SEARCH DATA: X100

- If the corresponding character string is not found, then the alarm message

559 DESIGNATED DATA NOT FOUND will be displayed.

9. REWIND operation (Option)

Use the following procedure to rewind paper tape:

[1] Press the menu selector key (green key located to the right of the menu keys)

to display the following menu on the screen:

LOAD

TAPEÆNC

ALL LOAD

TAPEÆNC

PUNCH

NCÆTAPE

ALL PUNCH

NCÆTAPE

COMPARE

NC=TAPE

ALL COM.

NC=TAPE

TAPE

SEARCH

REWIND

- If this menu is already on the display, the menu selector key does not need to

be pressed.

[2] Press the menu key REWIND.


INPUT

CANCEL

PREVIOUS

PAGE

NEXT

PAGE

START


- This will cause the display status of START to reverse and the paper tape

rewind operation to begin.

- After the paper tape rewind operation has been completed, the reverse-

display status of START will be released.

4-111

4-10 EIA/ISO INFOR Display

Function:

The EIA/ISO INFOR display should be called up on the screen when registering

the various types of data necessary for EIA/ISO program execution.

The EIA/ISO INFOR display consists of the following four displays:

1. TOOL OFFSET DATA display

The tool-data compensation that corresponds to each of the tools to be used

can be registered on this display.

2. WORK OFFSET DATA display

The workpiece coordinate system to be used for an EIA/ISO program can be

set on this display.

3. MACRO VARIABLE display

The common and/or local variables to be used for a user macroprogram can be

registered on this display.

4. TOOL LIFE INDEX display

The necessary data to control the tools to be used can be registered on this

display.

Procedure for calling up each display:

The following menu will be indicated when the display selector key (green key

located to the left of the menu keys) is pressed twice in succession:

EIA/ISO

INFORM.

MODAL

INFORM.

ALARM PROCESS

CONTROL

HARD

COPY

Here, pressing the menu key EIA/ISO INFORM. causes the following menu to

display:

TOOL

OFFSET

WORK

OFFSET

MACRO

VARIABLE

TOOL

LIFE

- If the menu key TOOL OFFSET is pressed, the TOOL OFFSET DATA display

will be indicated.

- If the menu key WORK OFFSET is pressed, the WORK OFFSET DATA display

will be indicated.

- If the menu key MACRO VARIABLE is pressed, the MACRO VARIABLE display

will be indicated. (The MACRO VARIABLE display consists of four subdisplays.

See section 4-10-3 MACRO VARIABLE display , for details of the individual

subdisplay calling procedures.)

- If the menu key TOOL LIFE is pressed, the TOOL LIFE INDEX display will be

indicated.

4-112

Note:

The individual data that has been registered on the EIA/ISO INFOR display is not

effective for MAZATROL programs.

4-10-1 TOOL OFFSET DATA display

Function:

This display should be called up on the screen when setting the amount of tool-

diameter or tool-position compensation of each tool to be used on an EIA/ISO

program. The TOOL OFFSET DATA display is divided into type A or type B,

depending on the model of machine being used.

DATA of the TOOL OFFSET DATA (TYPE A) display:

M3S031

NO. OFFSET NO. OFFSET NO. OFFSET NO. OFFSET1 ±99999.999 17 ±99999.999 33 ±99999.999 49 ±99999.9992 18 34 503 19 35 514 20 36 525 21 37 536 22 38 547 23 39 558 24 40 569 25 41 57

10 26 42 5811 27 43 5912 28 44 6013 29 45 6114 30 46 6215 31 47 6316 32 48 64

PAGE 1/

POSITIONX ±99999.999YZ4

MACHINEX ±99999.999YZ4

—

“

”

TEACH INCR. POSITION

SET

ALL

ERASE

TOOL

LIFE

PREVIOUS

PAGE

NEXT

PAGE

* * * TOOL OFFSET DATA (TYPE A) * * *

Notes:




— mm (inch) Amount of tool compensation

X, Y, Z mm (inch)

4 Degrees ( ° ) or mm

(inch)

MACHINE X, Y, Z mm (inch)


(inch)

“ Current position of the tool tip in the workpiece coordinate

system

” Current position of the point at which the centerline and end-face

of the spindle intersect in the machine coordinate system

Data name

OFFSET

POSITION

MACHINE

4-113

DATA of the TOOL OFFSET DATA (TYPE B) display:

M3S032

PAGE 1/

POSITIONX ±99999.999YZ4

MACHINEX ±99999.999YZ4

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

÷

NO.123456789

10111213141516

SHAPE CORR.±99999.999

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

—

DEFACE CORR.±99.999

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

“

SHAPE CORR.±99999.999

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

”

DEFACE CORR.±99.999

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

‘

TOOL LENGTH TOOL DIAMETER

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

’


SET

ALL

ERASE

TOOL

LIFE

PREVIOUS

PAGE

NEXT

PAGE

* * * TOOL OFFSET DATA (TYPE B) * * *

Notes:




— TOOL LENGTH—

SHAPE CORR.

mm (inch) Amount of figure compensation for tool length

“ TOOL LENGTH—

DEFACE CORR.

mm (inch) Amount of defacement compensation for tool length

” TOOL DIAMETER—

SHAPE CORR.

mm (inch) Amount of figure compensation for tool diameter

‘ TOOL DIAMETER—

DEFACE CORR.

mm (inch) Amount of defacement compensation for tool diameter

POSITION X, Y, Z mm (inch)


(inch)

MACHINE X, Y, Z mm (inch)


(inch)

’

÷

Current position of the tool tip in the workpiece coordinate

system

Current position of the point at which the centerline and end-face


POSITION

MACHINE

4-114

Display operations:

1. Tool-compensation data setting procedures

Use the following procedures to input data to the OFFSET item (data portion

—) of the TOOL OFFSET DATA (TYPE A) display or the SHAPE CORR. and

DEFACE CORR. items (data portions —, “, ” and ‘) of the TOOL OFFSET

DATA (TYPE B) display:

(1) Manual setting procedure

Assume that the TOOL OFFSET DATA display (type A or B) is already on the

screen.

[1] First, press the cursor key ( , , , or ) to call up the cursor

on the screen.

- If the key or is pressed, the cursor will appear in the upper left

corner of the screen.

- If the key or is pressed, the cursor will appear in the lower right

corner of the screen.

[2] Press the appropriate cursor key to move the cursor to the position in which

data is to be input.

[3] Specify the desired data with appropriate numeric key(s), and then press the

input key .

- The input data will then be displayed in the position where the cursor was

blinking.

(2) Automatic setting procedure

Using the TEACH function of the display, tool-length compensation data can be

automatically input to the OFFSET item (data portion —) of the TOOL OFFSET

DATA (TYPE A) display or the TOOL LENGTH-SHAPE CORR. item (data

portion —) of the TOOL OFFSET DATA (TYPE B) display.

[1] Move the spindle by hand and bring the tool tip into contact with the top

surface of either the reference block or the workpiece of a predetermined

height.

- See the Operating manual for machine.

[2] Call the TOOL OFFSET DATA display on the screen.



SET

ALL ERASE TOOL LIFE PREVIOUS

PAGE

NEXT

PAGE

4-115

[3] After the cursor appears on the screen, move it to the position of the OFFSET

item (in the case of type A) or TOOL LENGTH-SHAPE CORR. item (in the

case of type B).

- For details of cursor calling, see the description of step [1] of the Manual

setting procedure above.

[4] Press the menu key TEACH.

- This will cause the display status of TEACH to reverse and the message

DIST. FROM TABLE SURF. TO TEETH <INPUT>? to present.

[5] Specify the height of either the reference block or the workpiece using the

appropriate numeric key(s), and then press the input key .

- The NC equipment will then calculate the tool length, and the calculated value

will be automatically set under OFFSET item (in the case of type A) or TOOL

LENGTH-SHAPE CORR. item (in the case of type B). (See the figure below.)

M3S022

Table

Tool length

Distance fromthe table surface

to the tool tip

Currect positionof the machine

Machine zero-point

Distancefrom themachinezero-pointto thecurrectposition ofthemachine

Distancefrom themachinezero-pointto thetablesurface(constant)

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a











Reference block

or workpiece

Procedural step [1]

Since the current position of the machine is placed in the memory of the NC

equipment, it will calculate the length of the tool if the height of the reference

block or workpiece (i.e., the distance from the table surface to the tool tip) is

specified.

- The reverse-display status of TEACH will be released automatically.

4-116

2. Re-setting the current position

The current position of the tool tip in the workpiece coordinate system will be

displayed in the position of POSITION item.

In the description given below, assume that the TOOL OFFSET DATA display

(type A or B) is already on the screen.

[1] Press the menu key POSITION SET.

- This will cause the display status of POSITION SET to reverse and the

cursor to appear in the position of X item.

- In addition, the message X POSITION DISPLAY SET? will be displayed.

[2] Specify new X-axis coordinates with the appropriate numeric keys, and then

press the input key .

- The new coordinate values will then be displayed and the cursor will move to

the position of Y item.

- In addition, the message Y POSITION DISPLAY SET? will be displayed.

[3] Specify new Y-axis coordinates with the appropriate numeric keys, and then


[4] Similarly, specify new Z-axis coordinates and then press the input key .

- If an additional (fourth) axis is provided, a similar operation to the above is to

be carried out for the fourth axis.

- If re-setting is not to be done, just press the input key only.

- After new coordinate values for all the axes have been input, the reverse-

display status of POSITION SET will be released and the cursor will

disappear.

3. Functions and usage of other menu items

When the TOOL OFFSET DATA display (type A or B) is called up on the

screen, the following menu will be displayed in the menu display area:


SET

ALL ERASE TOOL LIFE PREVIOUS

PAGE

NEXT

PAGE

Of these menu items, TEACH and POSITION SET have been described in the

subsections of screen operations 1. and 2. above.

(1) INCR.

If the menu key INCR. is pressed, the numeric data that has already been set

can be updated just by setting an increment (or decrement) for the data.

For further details, see the description of screen operations 5.-(1), INCR., that

is given in TOOL DATA Display (section 4-6).

4-117

(2) ALL ERASE

If the menu key ALL ERASE is pressed, it becomes possible to erase the

individual tool-compensation values at one time (in type A, the entire data that

has been registered in data item —; in type B, the entire data that has been

registered in data item — through ‘).

The operating procedure is as follows:

[1] Press the menu key ALL ERASE .

- This will cause the display status of the ALL ERASE menu to reverse and the

message ALL ERASE < 9999 INPUT>? to display.

[2] Specify 9999 with the numeric keys and then press the input key .

- This will cause all the registered tool-compensation values to erase.

- In addition, the reverse-display status of ALL ERASE will be released.

(3) PREVIOUS PAGE and NEXT PAGE

If the menu key NEXT PAGE is pressed, the display will change over to the

next page of that display.

If the menu key PREVIOUS PAGE is pressed, the display will change back to

the preceding page of that display.

(4) TOOL LIFE

If the menu key TOOL LIFE is pressed, the TOOL LIFE INDEX display will be

indicated.

4-10-2 WORK OFFSET DATA display

Function:

This display should be called on the screen when setting the workpiece coordinate

system (G54 to G59) that is to be used under an EIA/ISO program.

4-118

DATA of the WORK OFFSET DATA display:

M3S034

G54

X –99999.999

Y

Z

4

— G56

X –99999.999

Y

Z

4

” G58

X –99999.999

Y

Z

4

’ SHIFT

X –99999.999

Y

Z

4

◊

G65

X –99999.999

Y

Z

4

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

“ G57

X –99999.999

Y

Z

4a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

‘ G59

X –99999.999

Y

Z

4

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

÷ MACHINE

X –99999.999

Y

Z

4

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

ÿ

TEACH INCR.

* * * WORK OFFSET DATA * * *

Notes:



No. Unit Description

G54 X, Y, Z mm (inch)

4 Degrees ( ° ) or mm (in.)






4 4 Degrees ( ° ) or mm (in.)








4 4 Degrees ( ° ) or mm (in.)

— Coordinate values of the G54 workpiece zero-point in the

machine coordinate system

“ Coordinate values of the G55 workpiece zero-point in the


” Coordinate values of the G56 workpiece zero-point in the


‘ Coordinate values of the G57 workpiece zero-point in the


G54

Data name

G55

G57

G56

’ Coordinate values of the G58 workpiece zero-point in the


÷ Coordinate values of the G59 workpiece zero-point in the


◊ Shift amounts of the G54 to G59 workpiece zero-point

coordinate values.

ÿ Current position of the point at which the centerline and end-face


G58

G59

MACHINE

SHIFT

4-119

Display operations:

The procedures for setting workpiece zero-point coordinate values are described

below.

Use of the TEACH function of the display makes it possible to automatically set the

coordinate values, in the machine coordinate system, of the zero-point of each

workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59) that is to be used under an EIA/ISO

program.

The operating procedures are as follows:

1. Setting X-Coordinate values

[1] Manually move the X-axis until the tool comes into contact with the workpiece

or reference block.

Example:

If the workpiece zero-point is at the position shown below:

M3S035

Proceduralstep [1]

Machine zero-point

Coordinate position

Workpiece zero-point

Workpiece

Distance to the work zero-point(Radius of the tool)5

+Z

+X

- See the Operating manual for machine for details of axis movement.

[2] Call up the WORK OFFSET DATA display on the screen.


TEACH INCR.

[3] Call up the cursor on the screen, and then move it to the position of X in the

workpiece coordinate system to be set.

- If the cursor key or is pressed, the cursor will appear in the

position of X of the G54 item.

- If the cursor key or is pressed, the cursor will appear in the

position of 4 of the G59 item.

4-120

[4] Press the menu key TEACH.

- This will cause the display status of TEACH to reverse and the message

EDGE CENTER POSITION IN WORK? to present.

[5] Using the appropriate numeric key(s), specify the distance from the centerline

of the tool (coordinate position) to the workpiece zero-point. Then, press the

input key .

- Normally, the radius of the tool is to be input. In the example shown above,

however, the radius must be input with a plus sign because the workpiece

zero-point is in the plus direction from the coordinate position. That is, press

the and keys, in that order.

- The NC equipment will then calculate the X-coordinate values of the

workpiece zero-point in the machine coordinate system, and the calculated

values will be automatically set in the position where the cursor was blinking.

- Subsequently, the reverse-display status of TEACH will be released.

2. Setting Y-coordinate values and Z-coordinate values

The Y-coordinate values and Z-coordinate values can be automatically set

using a similar procedure to that mentioned above.

For the Z-axis, however, the distance from the tool tip to the workpiece zero-

point is to be set in procedural step [5].

Note:

Use of INCR. allows the coordinate values of the workpiece zero-point already

registered to be changed simply by setting an increment (or decrement). For

further details, see the description of INCR. (screen operation 5.-(1)) that is

given in section 4-6 TOOL DATA Display.

4-121

4-10-3 MACRO VARIABLE display

Function:

This display should be called on the screen when setting data for the macro

variable(s) that is to be used in a user macro program.

There are two types of macro variables: common variables that can be used in

common to the main program and macro programs called from it, and local

variables that can be used only in macro programs.

The MACRO VARIABLE display consists of the following four sections:

1. COMMON VARIABLE display

The common variables that have been set on this display are used when

executing a user macro program in the automatic-operation mode.

2. COMMON VARIABLE (CHECK) display

The common variables that have been set on this display are used when

carrying out a tool-path check.

3. LOCAL VARIABLE display

The local variables that have been set on this display are used when executing

a user macro program in the automatic-operation mode.

4. LOCAL VARIABLE (CHECK) display

The local variables that have been set on this display are used when carrying

out a tool-path check.

Note:

The LOCAL VARIABLE display and the LOCAL VARIABLE (CHECK) display

present an indication of the variables that have been set thereon; neither display

allows variables to be changed.

For details of user macro programs, refer to the separate EIA/ISO Programming

manual.

Procedure for calling up each display:

When the MACRO VARIABLE display is called up on the screen, the COMMON

VARIABLE display will be indicated automatically.

In the menu display area, the following menu will be displayed:

COMMON

VARIABLE

COMMON

CHECK

LOCAL

VARIABLE

LOCAL

CHECK

EXP NEXT

PAGE

- If the menu key COMMON CHECK is pressed, the current display will change

over to the COMMON VARIABLE (CHECK) display.

- If the menu key LOCAL VARIABLE is pressed, the current display will change

over to the LOCAL VARIABLE display.

- If the menu key LOCAL CHECK is pressed, the current display will change over

to the LOCAL VARIABLE (CHECK) display.

- If the menu key COMMON VARIABLE is pressed, the current display will change

over to the COMMON VARIABLE display.

4-122

Data of the COMMON VARIABLE display:

M3S036

COMMON

VARIABLE

COMMON

CHECK

LOCAL

VARIABLE

LOCAL

CHECK

EXP NEXT

PAGE

* * * COMMON VARIABLE * * *

— “

NO.

#100

#101

#102

#103

#104

#105

#106

#107

#108

#109

#110

#111

#112

DATA

— “

NO.

#113

#114

#115

#116

#117

#118

#119

#120

#121

#122

#123

#124

#125

DATA

— “

NO.

#126

#127

#128

#129

#130

#131

#132

#133

#134

#135

#136

#137

#138

DATA

— “

NO.

#139

#140

#141

#142

#143

#144

#145

#146

#147

#148

#149

DATA



— NO. Variable identification number

“ DATA Variable that has been registered

4-123

Data of the LOCAL VARIABLE display:

M3S037

COMMON

VARIABLE

COMMON

CHECK

LOCAL

VARIABLE

LOCAL

CHECK

EXP NEXT

PAGE

* * * LOCAL VARIABLE * * *

— “

NO.

#1

#2

#3

#4

#5

#6

#7

#8

DATA

— “

NO.

#9

#10

#11

#12

#13

#14

#15

#16

DATA

— “

NO.

#17

#18

#19

#20

#21

#22

#23

#24

DATA

— “

NO.

#25

#26

#27

#28

#29

#30

#31

#32

DATA

NEST ( )

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

”



— NO. Variable identification number

“ DATA Variable that has been registered

” NEST ( ) Nesting number

Display operations:

Variables registering procedure:

Proceed as follows to input variables on the COMMON VARIABLE display or

COMMON VARIABLE (CHECK) display:

[1] First, call the cursor on the screen by pressing one of the following four cursor

keys:

- If the cursor key or is pressed, the cursor will appear at the upper

left corner of the screen.

- If the cursor key or is pressed, the cursor will appear at the lower

right corner of the screen.

4-124

[2] Press the appropriate cursor key to move the cursor to the NO. item of the

variable to be input.

[3] Specify the desired variable with the appropriate numeric key(s), and then


Notes:

1. Pressing the menu key EXP allows data to be input in exponential form.

Example:

If 2 × 10 6 is to be input:

Press the , EXP, , , and keys, in this order.

2. Pressing the menu key NEXT PAGE causes the current page of the display to

change over to the next page.

In addition, if the menu key NEXT PAGE is pressed while the LOCAL

VARIABLE or LOCAL VARIABLE (CHECK) display remains on the screen,

then the number in the NEST item (data portion ”) will change over to the

next serial number and the current page of the display will also change over to

the next page.

4-125

4-10-4 TOOL LIFE INDEX display

Function:

- The TOOL LIFE INDEX display should be made to be shown on the screen when

setting the data necessary for the filing of tool information used with the desired

EIA/ISO program (including spare-tool information).

- After this display has been shown, the tool information to be used with the

particular EIA/ISO program can be registered or deleted.

Data of the TOOL LIFE INDEX display:

M3S038

INCR. TOOL

ERASE

ALL

ERASE

TOOL

OFFSET

PREVIOUS

PAGE

NEXT

PAGE

* * * TOOL LIFE INDEX * * *( )

TNO.123456789

10111213141516

GROUP NO.99999999

H. NO.512

D NO512

— “ ‘”

OFFSET H±9999.999

’

OFFSET D±9999.999

÷

LIFE (M)9999

000000000000000

◊

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

ÿ

TIME (M)9999

000000000000000

PAGE 1/

Note:




— TNO. Tool number

“ GROUP NO. Tool group number (The same group number is assigned toeach of the tools which are of the same shape and dimensions.That is, a particular tool and its spare tool will have the samegroup number.)

” H.NO. Tool-length compensation number (see Note 1 )

‘ D NO. Tool-diameter compensation number (see Note 2 )

’ OFFSET H mm (inch) Tool-length compensation value (see Note 1 )

÷ OFFSET D mm (inch) Tool-diameter compensation value (see Note 2 )

◊ LIFE (M) minute Tool life

ÿ TIME (M) minute Tool operation time

4-126

Notes:

1. Either a tool-length compensation number or a tool-length compensation value

can be set for one tool.

2. Either a tool-diameter compensation number or a tool-diameter compensation

value can be set for one tool.

Display operations:

The TOOL LIFE INDEX display is used to set three types of data: tool group

numbers, tool compensation data, and tool-life control data.

1. Setting tool group numbers

[1] Call up the cursor on the screen by pressing the cursor key or .

- If the key is pressed, the cursor will appear in the uppermost position of

the GROUP NO. item on the screen.

- If the key is pressed, the cursor will appear in the lowermost position of

the GROUP NO. item on the screen.

[2] Press the cursor key or to move the cursor to the GROUP NO.

item line on which data is to be set.

- The message SAME TOOL GROUP NO.? will then be displayed.

[3] Input a tool group number and then press the input key .

- Any number from 0 to 99999999 can be input as a tool group number.

However, if the particular tool has the same shape and same dimensions as

those of a tool already registered, then the same group number must be input

to register the former tool as a spare for the latter.

- The input number will be displayed on the selected line of the GROUP NO.

item.

After each of the tools to be used with an EIA/ISO program has been assigned a

group number in this manner, the spare tool to be next used is automatically

selected from among the tools assigned the same group number. There are two

methods of spare-tool selection, as described below. Thus, one of the two methods

must be specified before automatic spare-tool selection can be executed.

4-127

(1) Selection in order of tool registration number (when 0 is set in bit 5 of

parameter F94):

If 0 is set in bit 5 of parameter F94 which appears on the USER PARAMETER

NO.1 display, tools that have neither reached their lives nor have become

damaged will be automatically selected in descending order of tool number

from among the tools assigned the same group number. (If all the tools with the

same group number have reached their lives or have become damaged, then

the tool with the largest tool number among all those tools that have reached

their lives will be selected. Or, if all the tools with the same group number have

become damaged, then the tool with the largest tool number will be selected.)

(2) Selection in order of length of life (when 1 is set in bit 5 of parameter F94):

If 1 is set in bit 5 of parameter F94 which appears on the USER PARAMETER

NO.1 display, the tool that has the least operation time will be automatically

selected from among the tools assigned the same group number. If there are

two or more tools that have the same operation time, the tool with the smallest

tool number among those tools will be selected. (If all tools with the same

group number have reached their lives or have become damaged, then the tool

with the largest tool number among all those tools that have reached their lives

will be selected. Or, if all the tools with the same group number have become

damaged, then the tool with the largest tool number will be selected.)

In addition, there are two methods of setting tool numbers during use of a

program—group number setting and individual tool number setting. These two

methods of tool number setting are described in detail below, together with the tool-

life filing and spare-tool changing manners.

(1) Designation by means of the group number (when bit 4 of parameter F94 is set

to 0):

When 0 is entered in bit 4 of parameter F94 displayed on the USER

PARAMETER NO. 1 display, the command number T in the program will be

considered as the group number and the spare tool will be selected according

to the group number recorded on the TOOL LIFE INDEX display. (If there are

several tools with the same group number, the spare tool will be selected

according to the selection types mentioned above.)

(2) Designation by means of the tool number (when bit 4 of parameter F94 is set

to 1):

When 1 is entered in bit 4 of parameter F94 displayed on the USER

PARAMETER NO. 1 display, the command number T in the program will be

considered as the tool number and the spare tool will be selected accroding to

the tool number recorded on the TOOL LIFE INDEX display. (If there are

several tools with the same group number, the spare tool will be selected

according to the selection types mentioned above.)

4-128

Example 1:

Group number setting

Program TOOL LIFE INDEX display

T01 T0M06;

Tool command

TNO GROUP NO. H.NO. D NO. OFFSET H OFFSET D LIFE (M) TIME (M)

1 2 0 0

2 1 60

3 1 60 0

4 2 0 0

61

Tool command number T01 that has been specified in the program is handled

as GROUP NO.1, and an automatic search is made for the TNOs to which

GROUP NO.1 has been assigned on the TOOL LIFE INDEX display. In the

example shown in the diagram above, there are two such TNOs—TNO.2 and

TNO.3. However, since TNO.2 is for the tool that has reached its life, TNO.3

will be selected.

Example 2:

Individual tool number setting

Program TOOL LIFE INDEX display

T01 T0M06;

Tool command

TNO GROUP NO. H.NO. D NO. OFFSET H OFFSET D LIFE (M) TIME (M)

1 2 60

2 1 0 0

3 1 0 0

4 2 60 0

65

Tool command number T01 that has been specified in the program is handled

as TNO. 1, and the TOOL LIFE INDEX display is searched for TNO.1.

The above example shows that TNO. 1 on the TOOL LIFE INDEX display is

for the tool that has reached its life. Thus, TNO. 4, which has the same group

number as that of TNO. 1, will be automatically selected instead.

2. Setting tool-compensation data

Tool-length compensation data and tool-diameter compensation data for the

individual tools which are to be used with an EIA/ISO program can be set on

the TOOL LIFE INDEX display. There are two methods of setting the two

types of data. One method is by using the compensation numbers that

correspond to the offset values which have been set on the TOOL OFFSET

display, and the other method is by setting the desired offset values directly.

4-129

(1) When using compensation numbers:

The procedures for setting tool-length compensation data and tool-diameter

compensation data using compensation numbers are described below. The

descriptions given below assume that the cursor is already called on the TOOL

LIFE INDEX display.

[1] Using the cursor keys ( , , , ), move the cursor to that line

of the H.NO. item on which data is to be set.

- The message OFFSET H.NO.? will then be displayed.

[2] Input the appropriate compensation number for the particular offset value, and

then press the input key .

- If the relationship between each offset value and compensation number is to

be checked, call the TOOL OFFSET display on the screen by pressing the

menu key TOOL OFFSET.

- The input compensation number will be displayed in the H.NO. item position,

and the cursor will move on to the D NO. item.

- Subsequently, the message OFFSET D NO.? will be displayed.

[3] Input the appropriate compensation number for the particular offset value, and

then press the input key .

- If the relationship between each offset value and compensation number is to

be checked, call the TOOL OFFSET display on the screen by pressing the

menu key TOOL OFFSET.

- The input compensation number will be displayed in the D NO. item position.

If compensation numbers are set on the TOOL LIFE INDEX display using this

method, these numbers take priority over any such number settings in the program.

Example:

Program TOOL OFFSET display

H1 ;

D2 ;

T01T0M06;

Tool-length

compensation number

Tool-diameter

compensation

TNO. OFFSET

1 10.1

2 10.2

3 10.3

4 10.4

For execution of the EIA/ISO program shown above:

If the following values are set in the H.NO. and D NO. items on the TOOL LIFE

INDEX display;

4-130

TOOL LIFE INDEX display

TNO. GROUP NO. H.NO. D NO. OFFSET H OFFSET D LIFE (M) TIME (M)

1 1 3 4 0 0

2 2 0 0

then the program will be executed with the tool-length compensation value (No.3=

10.3) and tool-diameter compensation value (No.4 = 10.4) that have been set on

the TOOL LIFE INDEX display, not with the tool-length compensation value (H1=

10.1) and tool-diameter compensation value (D2 = 10.2) that have been specified

in the program.

(2) Direct setting of compensation data:

The procedures for setting tool-length compensation data and tool-diameter

compensation data directly are described below.


of the OFFSET H item on which data is to be set.

- The message TOOL LENGTH REVISE? will then be displayed.

[2] Input appropriate compensation data and then press the input key .

- If changes are to be made to tool-length data that are already set, the old data

can be overridden with new data simply by setting increments (or

decrements) through the use of INCR. For usage of INCR., see the

description INCR. that is given in item 5.-(1), screen operations, of section 4-

6 TOOL DATA Display .

- The input compensation data will be displayed in the OFFSET H item position,

and the cursor will move on to the OFFSET D item.

- Subsequently, the message TOOL DIAMETER REVISE? will be displayed.

[3] Input appropriate compensation data and then press the input key .

- If changes are to be made to tool-diameter data that are already set, the old

data can be overridden with new data simply by setting increments (or

decrements) through the use of INCR. For usage of INCR., see the

description INCR. that is given in item 5.-(1), screen operations, of section 4-

6 TOOL DATA Display .

- The input compensation data will be displayed in the OFFSET D item position.

4-131

If compensation values are set on the TOOL LIFE INDEX display using this

method, these values take priority over any such value settings in the program.

Example:Program TOOL OFFSET display

Tool-length

compensation number

Tool-diameter

compensation number

TNO. OFFSET

1 10.1

2 10.2

3 10.3

4 10.4

H1 ;

D2 ;

T01T0M06;

For execution of the EIA/ISO program shown above: If the following values are set

in the OFFSET H and OFFSET D items on the TOOL LIFE INDEX display:



1 1 10.5 10.6 0 0

2 2 60 a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

61

then the program will be executed with the tool-length compensation value (10.5)

and tool-diameter compensation value (10.6) that have been set on the TOOL

LIFE INDEX display, not with the tool-length compensation value (H1 = 10.1) and

tool-diameter compensation value (D2 = 10.2) that have been specified in the

program.

Notes:

1. Data can be set in either the H.NO. item or the OFFSET H item for one tool.

2. Data can be set in either the D NO. item or the OFFSET D item for one tool.

3. If tool compensation data is not set on the TOOL LIFE INDEX display, the

compensation values that correspond to the compensation numbers specified

in the program become valid.

3. Setting tool-life control data

The procedure for setting tool-life control data on the TOOL LIFE INDEX

display is described below.


of the LIFE (M) item on which data is to be set.

- The message TOOL LIFE (MIN)? will then be displayed.

[2] Input the tool life (maximum available cutting time) in minutes with the numeric

keys, and then press the input key .

- The input value will be displayed in the LIFE (M) item.

- At the same time, this value will also be set in the LIFE (M) item of the

corresponding tool number line on the TOOL DATA display. (If no tool data is

registered in this tool number line, this value will not be set.)

4-132

Example:

TNO. LIFE (M) TIME (M)

1 0 0

2

3



1 0 0

2 60

3

TOOL DATA display

When 60, for example, is input, the same value will be set

automatically.

60

- The cursor will subsequently move on the TIME (M) item, and the message

TOOL CUTTING TIME (MIN)? will be displayed.

Note:

If data is not set in the LIFE (M) item for a tool (setting data 0 has been

remained), then the life information of that tool cannot be controlled

automatically.

[3] Input the tool operation time (cumulative cutting-feed time) in minutes with the

numeric keys, and then press the input key .

- The input value will be displayed in the TIME (M) item.

- At the same time, this value will also be set in the TIME (M) item of the

corresponding tool number line on the TOOL DATA display if a tool has

already been registered under the corresponding tool number on the TOOL

DATA display. (If not, this value will not be set.)

Example:


1 0 0

2 60

3



1 0 0

2 60 5

3

TOOL DATA display

When 5, for example, is input, the same value will be set

automatically.

5

- This data need not to be set for an unused tool. (0 is initially set in the TIME

(M) item.)

- Each time a tool is used for a cutting-feed operation, the tool operation time

will be integrated in minutes.

- When the operation time reaches the life data set in procedural step [2]

above, the display of the data settings in the TIME (M) item will be reversed.

4-133

Note:

On tool-life control during execution of MAZATROL and EIA/ISO programs:

(1) MAZATROL program

During execution of a MAZATROL program, although the data settings in the

TIME (M) item of the TOOL DATA display are integrated, those in the TIME

(M) item of the TOOL LIFE INDEX display are not integrated.

(2) EIA/ISO program

During execution of an EIA/ISO program, the data settings in the TIME (M) item

of the TOOL LIFE INDEX display are integrated. In addition, the data settings

in the TIME (M) item of the TOOL DATA display are also integrated if 1 has

been set in parameter F67.

(3) MAZATROL and EIA/ISO program

In combined use of MAZATROL and EIA/ISO programs as shown in the

diagram below, the data settings in the TIME (M) item of the TOOL DATA

display are integrated while the MAZATROL program is being executed, and

the data settings in the TIME (M) item of the TOOL LIFE INDEX display are

integrated while the EIA/ISO program is being executed. If, however, 1 has

been set in parameter F67, integration of the data settings in the TIME (M) item

of the TOOL DATA display will also occur even during execution of the

EIA/ISO program.

MAZATROL

EIA/ISO

MAZATROL Subprogram

TOOL DATA

TOOL DATA

TOOL DATA

(1) MAZATROL program

(2) EIA/ISO program

(3) MAZATROL and EIA/ISO program

TOOL LIFEINDEX

Main program

TOOL LIFEINDEX

M3S039

EIA/ISO

4-134

4. Erasing the registered tool data

The data that has been registered using methods 1., 2. and 3. above can be

erased for each tool. In addition, all sets of tool data that have been registered

can be erased at one time if required. The procedures for erasing the tool data

on a tool basis and for erasing all sets of tool data are described below.

(1) Erasing the tool data on a tool basis

[1] By pressing the cursor key or , move the cursor to the line of the

GROUP NO. item which contains the data to be erased.

Example:

When erasing the data that has been set on the line of TNO.5 shown in the

diagram below:


1 1 10 5 60 10

2 2 9 6 60 11

3 3 8 7 60 12

4 4 7 8 60 13

5 6 9 60 14

6 6 5 10 60 15

5



- This will cause the display status of TOOL ERASE to reverse and the

message CURSOR POSITION ERASE <INPUT>? to present.


- The entire set of data present on the line blinking with the cursor will then be

erased.

- In the example shown in the diagram above, screen display will be as follows:


1 1 10 5 60 10

2 2 9 6 60 11

3 3 8 7 60 12

4 4 7 8 60 13

5 0 0

6 6 5 10 60 15

- The reverse status of TOOL ERASE display will be subsequently cleared.

4-135

(2) Erasing all sets of tool data that have been registered

[1] Press the menu key ALL ERASE .

- This will cause the display status of ALL ERASE to reverse and the message

ALL ERASE < 9999 INPUT>? to present.

[2] Specify 9999 with the numeric keys and then press the input key .

- Key-in , , , , , and , in this order.

- These keystrokes erase all the TOOL LIFE INDEX data settings.

- The reverse status of ALL ERASE display will be subsequently released.

5. Displaying PREVIOUS PAGE and NEXT PAGE

Tool data having up to tool number 16 can be displayed on the first page of the

TOOL LIFE INDEX display.

To proceed to the next page, press the menu key NEXT PAGE. To return to

the immediately previous page, press the menu key PREVIOUS PAGE.

4-11 MODAL INFO. Display

Function:

If this display is called on the screen during automatic operation, it becomes

possible to check which of the G codes in various modal groups is currently

effective. This display only indicates the execution status of automatic operation;

the display does not allow screen operations to be carried out on it.

For details of the G codes, refer to the separate EIA/ISO Programming manual.

For reference, MODAL means to continue the operation until the designated

address receive a new command or that address is cancelled.

4-136

Data of the MODAL INFO. display:

M3S040

WORK NO. ( )— UNIT NO.“ BLOCK NO.”

SPINDL NO.

( )‘ NEXT NO.

( )

’ MAGAZIN NO.

( )

÷ INDEX NO.◊

PALLET NO.ÿ

GROUP GROUP

1 G1 13 G642 G17 14 G673 G91 154 G22 16 G695 G94 17 G976 G21 18 G157 G40 19 G50.18 G499 G80

10 G9811 G5012 G54

Ÿ

X FY SZ T4 M5 B6 D

H⁄

EIA/ISO

INFORM

MODAL

INFORM

ALARM PROCESS

MANAGE

HARD

COPY

* * * MODAL INFO. * * *( )

Note:

Values in the display are for reference; they are not actual values that are

displayed.



— WORK NO. Workpiece number of the program currently being executed

( ) Workpiece number of the subprogram currently being executed

“ UNIT NO. Identification number of the program unit currently being executed

” BLOCK NO. Identification number of the program block currently being executed

SPINDL NO. Identification number of the tool mounted on the spindle

( ) Name of the tool mounted on the spindle

NEXT NO. Identification number of the standby tool

( ) Name of the standby tool

MAGAZIN NO. Identification number of the magazine pocket

( ) Name of the tool accommodated in the magazine pocket

◊ INDEX Index angle of table

ÿ PALLET NO. Identification number of the pallet being used (This data is displayed

only when the machine has a pallet change function.)

Ÿ GROUP G code in each modal group which is currently effective

⁄ Command being executed

—

÷

‘

’

4-137

4-12 ALARM Display

M3S041

EIA/ISO

INFORM

MODAL

INFORM

ALARM PROCESS

MANAGE

HARD

COPY

* * * ALARM * * *( )

TOTAL = 1

402 ILLEGAL FORMAT

The ALARM display can display up to 16 alarm states of which the causes are not

yet eliminated.

For several such alarm states, this display can also indicate special values for ease

of locating the causes. See in separate volume Alarm list, for details of 16 alarm

states and messages.

4-13 PROCESS WORK Display

Function:

Each machining program is divided into several processes according to the drum-

changing process unit, the pallet-changing process unit, and their respective

process-end units. The PROCESS WORK display should be called on the screen

when checking the status of connection of these processes or when checking the

configuration of subprograms within processes.

Note:

Subprograms that are called from the EIA/ISO programs will not be displayed on

this display.

4-138

Data of the PROCESS WORK. display:

M3S042

PNO

— 1

DRUM NO.

“ !

PALLET NO.

” !

LNO.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

‘

MAIN

1001

SUB 1

1002

SUB 2

1003

SUB 3

1004

SUB 4

1005

SUB 5

1006

SUB 6

1007

SUB 7

1008

1008

SUB 10

1011

’ ÷ ◊ ÿ Ÿ ⁄

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

M

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

M

E

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

M

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

M

M

SUB 9

1010

1010

SUB 8

1009

1009

WORK NO. PROC NO.

SEARCH

≠

≠

Ø

Ø

PROGRAM

LAYOUT

PROGRAM

* * * PROCESS WORK NO. 9999 * * *( )



— PNO. Process number

“ DRUM NO. Identification number of the tool drum to be used

” PALLET NO. Identification number of the pallet to be used

‘ LNO. Layout number

’ MAIN Workpiece number of the main program

÷ SUB 1 Workpiece number of the subprogram (Nesting 1)

◊ SUB 2 Workpiece number of the subprogram (Nesting 2)

ÿ SUB 3 Workpiece number of the subprogram (Nesting 3)

Ÿ SUB 4 Workpiece number of the subprogram (Nesting 4)

⁄ SUB 5 Workpiece number of the subprogram (Nesting 5)

SUB 6 Workpiece number of the subprogram (Nesting 6)





4-139

Display operations:

When the PROCESS WORK display is changed over from another display, the

following menu will be displayed in the menu display area:

WORK NO. PROC NO.

SEARCH

≠

≠

Ø

Ø

PROGRAM

LAYOUT

PROGRAM

1. Workpiece-number search

When the PROCESS WORK display is called up on the screen, the display

status of WORK NO. will reverse. In addition, the process control data of the

program which was selected in the previous operation will be displayed on the

screen. Therefore, the workpiece number of the program whose process

control data is to be checked must be specified first.

In response to the message WORK PIECE PROGRAM NUMBER? , specify

the corresponding workpiece number using the following procedure:


program whose process control data is to be displayed. Then, press the input

key .

- The input workpiece number will then be displayed in the MAIN item (data

portion ’), and the process control data of the specified program will be

displayed on the screen.

- The reverse-display status of WORK NO. will subsequently be released.

2. Process-number search

When a workpiece number is input using the above-mentioned operating

procedure [1], control data related to the first process of the specified program

will be displayed. If control data related to the other processes of the specified

program is to be checked on the screen, use the procedure described below.

[1] Press the menu key PROC. NO. SEARCH.

- This will cause the display status of PROC. NO. SEARCH to reverse and the

message PROCESS NO.? to display.

[2] Using the appropriate numeric key(s), specify the identification number of the

process whose control data is to be checked. Then, press the input key .

- The input process number will then be displayed in the PNO. item (data

portion —), and the control data of the specified process will be displayed on

the screen.

- Subsequently, the reverse-display status of PROC. NO. SEARCH will be

released.

4-140

3. Functions of other menu items

- The cursor can be moved downward on a process basis by pressing the

menu key .

- The cursor can be moved upward on a process basis by pressing the menu

key .

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

ØØ

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

≠≠

- The display can be switched over to the PRG. LAYOUT PROCE. display by

pressing the menu key PROGRAM LAYOUT .

- The display can be switched over to the WK. PROGRAM display by pressing

the menu key PROGRAM.

4-141

4-13-1 PRG. LAYOUT PROCE. display

Function:

Tool data used in each process is indicated in machining order on the PRG.

LAYOUT PROCE. display.

This display will be indicated when the menu key PROGRAM LAYOUT on the

PROCESS WORK display is pressed.

Data of the PRG. LAYOUT PROCE. display

M3S043

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

”a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a‘

PRI NO.99

TOOLF-MILL

NO.999

SEQR1

NOM-z999. 9A

“ ’

WORK NO.9999M

UNITFACE MIL

LNO.999

UNO.999

÷ ÿ Ÿ◊

PROCESS

CONTROL

NEXT

PAGE

* * * PRG. LAYOUT PROCE. NO. 9999 * * *( )

—

Note:




— NO. Order of machining priority

“ PRI NO. Tool priority number

” SEQ Tool sequence number

‘ TOOL Tool name

’ NOM-z mm (inch) Nominal diameter of the tool

÷ LNO. Layout number

◊ WORK NO. Workpiece number of the program

ÿ UNO. Unit number

Ÿ UNIT Name of the unit

4-142

Display operations:

When the PRG. LAYOUT PROCE. display is called from the PROCESS WORK

display, the following menu will be indicated in the menu display area:

PROCESS

CONTROL

NEXT

PAGE

Here, if the menu key PROCESS CONTROL is pressed, the display will change

back to PROCESS WORK display.

On the PRG. LAYOUT PROCE. display, up to the 15th set of tool data per page is

displayed. The 16th and subsequent sets of tool data can be displayed by pressing

the menu key NEXT PAGE. For the repeat counts of multi-workpiece machining

processes or subprogram execution processes, only one round of process data will

be displayed each time.

4-14 Machining Management Functions (Option)

The machining management functions are designed so that machining

management information for each pallet can be managed by saving the information

into a PALLET MANAGEMENT display area and pallet ID information separate

from the machining program data field. This allows the machining program

sequence to be changed according to the status of the workpiece without updating

the program. These functions are therefore effective for multi-pallet types of

machines, in particular, that have recently come into widespread use.

4-143

4-14-1 Function overview

1. Scheduled-operation function

Allows the machining sequence to be designated for each pallet on the

PALLET MANAGEMENT display. This eliminates the need for program

updating.

2. External unit skipping function

Allows the MMS unit and subprogram unit of a machining program to be

designated on the PALLET MANAGEMENT display as the program units to be

skipped.

3. External multi-piece machining function

Allows a multi-piece machining process to be included in a machining program

by designating that process on the PALLET MANAGEMENT display.

4. Jig offsetting function

Allows offsetting data from a reference pallet to be designated on the PALLET

MANAGEMENT display. Thus, constant machining accuracy can be achieved

even when workpieces of the same type are machined using multiple pallets.

Data of the PALLET MANAGEMENT display:

M3S044

NO. PALET WNO. STATE ORDER NUMBER

1 1 10 READY 1 0

2 2 ! 0

3 3 ! 0

4 4 ! 0

5 5 ! 0

6 6 ! 0

7 — “ ” ‘ ’

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

NO. 1 ÷ PALLET NO. 1

◊ WORK NO.

ÿ UNIT SKIP SWITCH 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

ON ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

OFF ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

Ÿ MULTIPLE SWITCH 10 6 5 1

MAIN 00000 00000

A 00000 00000

B 00000 00000

C 00000 00000

D 00000 00000

⁄ JIG OFFSET

X 0.

Y 0.

Z 0.

EDIT PREVIOUS

PAGE

NEXT

PAGE

* * * PALLET MANAGEMENT * * *( )

4-144

Display operations:

The procedure for calling up the PALLET MANAGEMENT display;

[1] Press the display selector key (green key located to the left of the menu keys).

POSITION COMMAND TRACE PROGRAM TOOL

FILE

TOOL

DATA

TOOL

LAYOUT

PAR DATA

I/O


EIA/ISO

INFORM

MODAL

INFORM

ALARM PROCESS

CONTROL

MONITOR ARRANGE HARD

COPY

[2] Press the menu key ARRANGE .


PALLET

MANAG.

TOOL

OFFSET

WORK

OFFSET

ADDITION TOOL

DATA

TOOL

LAYOUT

MEASURE

[3] Press the menu key PALLET MANAG.

- The PALLET MANAGEMENT display will then be indicated.

4-14-2 Scheduled-operation function

1. Data of the PALLET MANAGEMENT display

Data displayed for the scheduled-operation function is described below. (On the

screen, the data is indicated as — through ’.)


No. Data name Description

— PALET The number of pallets that is initially set for the particular machine specifications is displayed.

“ WNO. The number of the machining main program to be used for each pallet is displayed.

” STATE The machining status is displayed for each pallet.

(Blank) . . . . . . . . . . Indicates that machining will not be performed. Machining will be

performed only if “!” is not displayed under ORDER.

READY . . . . . . . . . . Indicates that the machine is ready for machining.

CUTTING . . . . . . . . Indicates that machining is in progress.

OVER . . . . . . . . . . . Indicates that machining has been completed.

(Alarm No.) . . . . . . . Identifies the alarm that has occurred during machining.

UNMADE . . . . . . . . Indicates that machining has been aborted since the reset button was

pressed during machining.

‘ ORDER The machining order is displayed for each pallet.

Machining will not be performed if the pallet number has a displayed “!” or UNMADE.

’ NUMBER The total count of times of machining up to that time is displayed. The maximum count is 9999.

4-145

2. Data editing methods

WNO., STATE, ORDER, NUMBER and multiple process numbers are set for

editing scheduled-operation data. These methods are described below.

(1) Setting WNO.

Set the numbers of the main programs to be executed for each pallet.

[1] Press the menu key EDIT on the PALLET MANAGEMENT display.

Only the number of pallets that is predetermined for the particular machine

specifications will then be displayed.

[2] Move the cursor to WNO. of the intended workpiece using the cursor keys.


1 1

2 2

3...

Cursor

[3] When the inquiry message WORKPIECE PROGRAM NUMBER? is displayed,

using the appropriate numeric key(s), enter the number of the machining

program (main routine) which corresponds to the pallet. Then press the input

key .

Example:

To set WNO. 123, press in this order.

(2) Setting data in STATE item

Set the status of machining on each pallet.

[1] Move the cursor to STATE item using the cursor key.


1 1 123

2 2

3...

Cursor

[2] When the inquiry message STATE <MENU>? is displayed, press the menu

key SET END and set READY if operational setup for palletizing has been

finished and the machine is ready for machining.

If READY is set, the machining order will also be set automatically. Data

displayed under ORDER item at this time will be the number next to that of a

pallet having a displayed READY.

4-146

- To cancel READY present under STATE item, press the menu key ERASE.

STATE item will become blank, “!” will be displayed under ORDER item,

and the data under ORDER item for other pallets will be converted.

NO. PALET WNO. STATE ORDER

1 1 10 READY 3

2 2 20 READY 1

3 3 30 READY 2

4 4 40 READY 5

5 5 50 READY 6

6 6 60 EADY 4...

R

Cursor

Cancel READY on the line PALET 6.

Press the menu key ERASE.


1 1 10 READY 3

2 2 20 READY 1

3 3 30 READY 2

4 4 40 READY 4

5 5 50 READY 5

6 6 60 !

7...

4-147

(3) Changing data in ORDER

When changing the machining order that has already been set, move the

cursor to that field of ORDER item, enter new data using the appropriate

numeric key(s) and press the input key .

Example:


1 1 10 READY 5

2 2 20 READY 1

3 3 30 READY 2

4 4 40 READY

5 5 50 READY 3

6 6 60 READY 6...

4 Cursor

Update the data of ORDER in line PALET 4 to 1.

Press and .


1 1 10 READY 5

2 2 20 READY 2

3 3 30 READY 3

4 4 40 READY 1

5 5 50 READY 4

6 6 60 READY 6

7...

1 The data updates to 1.

(4) Setting data in NUMBER item

Data from 0 to 9999 can be set and it will be counted from the set data at the

end of machining.

Notes:

1. If the data more than 9999 is set under NUMBER item, it will not be

counted even at the end of machining.

2. The data set under NUMBER item is not in relation with the data set under

NUMBER item in end unit.

(5) Setting multiple process numbers

If the machining program for pallets is structured for each workpiece and/or

each process separately, multiple main programs can be set by setting the

numbers of those processes.

4-148

[1] Move the cursor to the position of the pallet number for which multiple

processes are to be executed.

Example:

To set multiple processes for PALET 3:


1 1 10 READY 5

2 2 20 READY 2

3 3 30 READY 3

4 4 40 READY 1

5 5 50 READY 4

6 6 60 READY 6

7...

3

Cursor

[2] Press the menu key PLURAL PROCESS , and press the input key .


1 1 10 READY 5

2 2 20 READY 2

3 3 READY !

4 3 30 READY 3

5 4 40 READY 4

6 5 50 READY 6

7 6 60 READY 6...

- Erasing a process number

[1] Move the cursor to the position of that process number of all those previously

set for the multi-process pallet that is to be erased.


1 1 10 READY 5

2 2 20 READY 2

3 3

4 3 30 READY 3

5 4 40 READY 1

6 5 50 READY 4

7 6 60 READY 6...

3

Cursor

4-149

[2] Press the menu key ERASE, and press the input key .


1 1 10 READY 5

2 2 20 READY 2

3 3 30 READY 3

4 4 40 READY 1

5 5 50 READY 4

6 6 60 READY 6

7...

(6) ALL ERASE

This function clears the entire schedule that has been set. Carry out this

function when using “Initialize” for the first time in the initial status of the NC

system (that is, immediately after the NC system has been loaded).

<Setting method>

Press the menu key ALL ERASE . When the message ALL ERASE <–9999

INPUT>? is displayed, enter “ 9999” and then press the input key .

The display will then be initialized.

3. Starting scheduled operation and its progress display

The procedure for starting scheduled operation and the display of the progress

of scheduled operation are described below.

(1) Starting procedure and progress display

1) Enter necessary data on the PALLET MANAGEMENT display.

See subparagraph 2., “Data editing methods”, for further details.

2) Make the scheduled-operation mode effective using an external switch.

WORK NO. on the COMMAND display will then become highlighted red.

3) Press the start button. Machining will begin with the workpiece of

machining order number 1 and the status will change into CUTTING.

4) When machining is completed, OVER and ! will be displayed under

STATE and ORDER items, respectively, and new data for other pallets will

be displayed under ORDER item.

4-150

Example:


1 1 10 READY 4

2 2 20 READY 2

3 3 30 1

4 4 40 READY 5

5 5 50 READY 3

6 6 60 READY 6

7...

3 CUTTING

Machining PALET 3 is completed.


1 1 10 READY 3

2 2 20 1

3 3 30 OVER !

4 4 40 READY 4

5 5 50 READY 2

6 6 60 READY 5

7...

2 CUTTING

5) The machining process that corresponds to the pallet number having a

newly displayed 1 under ORDER item will start.

(2) Editing in the scheduled-operation mode

Even during scheduled operation, editing can be done on the PALLET

MANAGEMENT display, except for the line of 1 under ORDER item

(machining now in progress).

See subparagraph 2. “Data editing methods”, for further details of editing.

If the machining for pallets is finished during EDIT mode, the machine will be

stopped. In this case, press the menu key EDIT END, then press start button

to continue machining.

(3) Restarting in the scheduled-operation mode

Restarting in the scheduled-operation mode can be done in the following two

cases only.

1) If the workpiece number of 1 under ORDER item is the same as that

displayed on the COMMAND display

2) If unit skipping is designated

For 2) above, if the unit skipping switch is on, execution of that unit will be

skipped and the immediately succeeding unit will be executed.

4-151

4. Other precautions

(1) Pressing the RESET key changes CUTTING to UNMADE. If there are pallets to

be machined, set READY under STATE.

(2) If an alarm occurs during machining, the alarm will be processed as follows:

- The alarm number is set under STATE.

- ! is displayed under ORDER, and the machining order is updated.

- If the alarm is of such a type that machining can be continued, the machining

operation will start from the machining program preset for the next process. If

machining cannot be continued, it will terminate on occurrence of the alarm.

Note:

Do not set a multi-process program that enables machining to be done only

after the preprocess has been completed. If such a program is set and an

alarm occurs, the previous process will remain aborted and the next process

will begin. Use a subprogram if such programming is required.

(3) The external switch must be turned off when machining is to be done in the

normal mode. If machining is done in the scheduled-operation mode, scheduled

operation will be carried out with automatically updated workpiece numbers.

- Distinction of sheculed-operation and normal-mode operation:

If the workpiece numbers on the COMMAND display are displayed red in

highlighted form, then scheduled-operation is in effect.

If the workpiece numbers on the COMMAND display are not displayed red in

highlighted form, then normal-mode operation is in effect.

4-14-3 External unit skipping function

1. Data of the PALLET MANAGEMENT display.



÷ PALET NO The pallet number corresponding to data — is displayed.

◊ WORK NO. The workpiece number corresponding to data “ is displayed.

ÿ UNIT SKIP

SWITCH

The program is controlled according to ON (skipping), OFF (no skipping) of the bit corresponding to

a skip number from 0 to 9 on that program.

2. Entering data

Set UNIT SKIP SWITCH as follows to activate the external unit skipping

functions.

4-152


[2] Press the cursor key(s) to move the cursor to the position of the intended pallet

number.

[3] Press the menu key EXIT. INP. EDIT.

- The cursor will be moved to the UNIT SKIP SWITCH item.

[4] Move the cursor to the position of the intended skip number.

[5] Pressing ON or OFF menu key completes UNIT SKIP SWITCH setting.

[6] Set either from “0” to “9” in the $ field of the subprogram unit on the WK.

PROGRAM display. Refer to the Programming manual for setting procedure.

[7] Press the menu key EDIT END on the PALLET MANAGEMENT display.

3. Starting operation

See subsection 4-14-2. The operating procedure is the same.

4. Operation

A specific example is shown below.

Example:

WNO.

100WNO.

200

WNO.

100WNO.

200

Unmachined

Machined

Machined Unmachined

Pallet 1 Pallet 2

M3S045

4-153

Program WNO. 1 (Main program)

UNO. X Y k Z 4

1 WPC-1 300 300 0 400 0

UNO. WORK NO. $ REPEAT ARGM1

2 SUB PRO 100 1 1

UNO. WORK NO. $ REPEAT ARGM1

3 SUB PRO 200 2 1

PALLET MANAGEMENT display


1 1 1 READY 1 0

2 2 1 READY 2 0

3 3

4 4

NO. 1

PALET NO. 1

WORK NO. 1

UNIT SKIP SWITCH 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

ON !

OFF !!!!!!!! !

NO. 2

PALET NO. 2

WORK NO. 1

UNIT SKIP SWITCH 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

ON !

OFF !!!! !!! !!

For pallet 1, since unit skipping switch 1

is set to ON, UNO. 2 (that is,

subprogram No. 100) will be skipped.

For pallet 2, since unit skipping switch 2

is set to ON, UNO. 3 (that is,

subprogram No. 200) will be skipped.

4-14-4 External multi-piece machining function

1. Data of the PALLET MANAGEMENT display.



Ÿ MULTIPLE

SWITCH

Multi-piece machining will be performed if the bits corresponding to the multi-piece machining flag

(MULTI FLAG) on the program are correspondingly set.

2. Entering data

Set MULTIPLE SWITCH as follows to activate the external multi-workpiece

machining functions:


[2] Press the cursor key(s) to move the cursor to the position of the intended pallet

number.

4-154

[3] Press the menu key EXT. INP. EDIT.

[4] Set the cursor to the MAIN, A, B, C, or D data item of MULTIPLE SWITCH.

[5] Press data key 0 or 1 to enter a 10-bit number of 0s or 1s.

[6] If you have selected either one from A to D in step [4] above, set that selected

switch in the $ field of the subprogram unit on the WK. PROGRAM display.

Refer to the Programming manual for the setting procedure.

[7] Press the menu key EDIT END on the PALLET MANAGEMENT display.

3. Starting operation

See subsection 4-14-2. The operating procedure is the same.

4. Operation

A specific example is shown below.

Example:

Pallet 1 Pallet 2

Machined

Unmachined

Unmachined Machined

M3S046

Program WNO. 1 (Main program)

UNO. MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE PITCH-X PITCH-Y

0 CST IRN 50 1 5*2 10 10

UNO. X Y k Z 4

1 WPC-1 300 300 0 400 0

UNO.

2 LINE OUT

SNO.

R1 E-MILL

FIG

1 SQR

UNO. WORK NO. $ REPEAT ARGM 1

3 SUB PRO 100 A 1

UNO. CONTI. NUMBER

4 END 0 0

MULTI FLAG

1100010101

4-155

Program WNO. 100 (Subprogram)

UNO. MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y

0 CST IRN 50 1 OFFSET ! ! !

OFS X Y k Z

1 10 10

2 20 20

3 30 30

UNO.

1 DRILLING

SNO.

1 CTR-DR

2 DRILL

FIG Z X Y

1 PT 0 0 0

UNO. CONTI. NUMBER

2 END 1 0

MULTI FLAG

consider

0000000111



1 1 1 READY 1 0

2 2 1 READY 2 0

3 3

4 4

5

6

7

NO. 1

PALET NO. 1

WORK NO. 1

UNIT SKIP 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

SWITCH ON

OFF! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

MULTIPLE 10 6 5 1

SWITCH MAIN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

MULTIPLE SWITCH MAIN correspondsto the MULTI FLAG on the mainprogram, and MULTIPLE SWITCH A toD (set in $ of the subprogram unit)correspond to the MULTI FLAG on thesubprogram.

NO. 2

PALET NO. 2

WORK NO. 1

UNIT SKIP 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

SWITCH ON

OFF! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

MULTIPLE 10 6 5 1

SWITCH MAIN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

4-156

- Pallet 1

(Main program)

MAIN 0000000000 (If all bits are 0s, they will all be handled the

same as 1s.)

MAIN 1111111111

MULTI FLAG1100010101

Common 1100010101 Æ (Main program)

(Subprogram)

A 0000000000 (If all bits are 0s, they will all be handled the

same as 1s.)

A 1111111111


Common 0000000111 Æ (Subprogram)

- Pallet 2

(Main program)

MAIN 1100000000


Common 1100000000

(Subprogram)

A 0000000101


Common 0000000101

4-14-5 Jig offsetting function

1. Data of the PALLET MANAGEMENT display



⁄ JIG OFFSET The amounts of offset from the reference point of a reference pallet at a table angle of 0 degrees

are input to X, Y, and Z with plus or minus signs.

2. Entering data

Set JIG OFFSET as follows to activate the jig offset function.


[2] Press the cursor to move the cursor to the position of the intended pallet

number.

[3] Press the menu key EXT. INP. EDIT.

[4] Set the cursor to the X, Y or Z data item of JIG OFFSET.

4-157

[5] Using the numeric key(s), set the amount of offset from the reference point of

a reference pallet and press the input key .

[6] Press the menu key EDIT END.

3. Meaning of jig offset data

When, as shown below, the reference point differs between the reference pallet

jig (indicated by a discontinuous line) and the intended jig (indicated by a

continuous line), set the amounts of offset at a table angle of 0 degrees ($x,

$y, $z) as the offsetting data for the jig you are going to use.

The offsetting data thus set will be added to the program coordinates and the

machining program will operate on the coordinate systems having the added

data.

X-Z direction

M3S047

Jig

$Z

$X +X

+Z

Y-Z direction X-Y direction

M3S048

$Z

$Y +Y

+Z

$X

$Y +Y

+X

Note:

Discontinuous line: Reference pallet jig

Continuous line: Non-reference pallet jig

$X, $Y, $Z: Amounts of offset from the reference point of a reference

pallet

4-158

4. Notes

Strictly observe the following notes when using the jig offsetting function:

(1) Data containing the jig offsetting data is displayed in the field of WPC

(workpiece coordinates) of the COMMAND display.

(2) Set jig offsetting data to 0 if the jig offsetting function is not to be used.

(3) Jig offsetting will not be performed if the table is rotated using the B code

commands of manual programs or EIA programs. Only the indexing unit will

be executed in such a case.

(4) Since the jig offsetting function only corrects any offsets in each axis

direction, no corrections are performed for any offsets in the rotational

direction of each axis.

1) X—Z direction

M3S049

+X

+Z

Offsetting possible Offsetting impossible

2) Y direction

M3S050

Offsetting possible Offsetting impossible

(5) During MMS measurement, data not containing the jig offsetting data is

written into the program coordinate data area.

4-159

4-14-6 Parameters

The following lists parameters related to the machining management functions:

Parameter Setting value Description

L54 0

1

2

The machining management functions become invalid.

Pallet ID operation is selected.

Machining management operation is selected.

L53

1

0

On the PALLET MANAGEMENT display, workpiece numbers are:

Displayed

Not displayed

4-14-7 Machining management data writing macro-program

1. Overview

The UNIT SKIP SWITCH data, MULTIPLE SWITCH data, and JIG OFFSET

data that are saved within the machining management feature can be updated

from macro-programs.

Updating uses special system variables. For macroprograms that only require

setting of data in those variables, however, special setting is required for

updating.

This feature becomes valid only when the main program is a MAZATROL

program.

Updating will not occur if an updating program is executed alone. Make an

updating program so that it can be called using a subprogram unit of a

MAZATROL program.

Main program

(MAZATROL)

Subprogram unit

Main program

(EIA/ISO)

Updated NO. 1

PALLET NO. 1

WORK NO. 1234

UNIT SKIP SWITCH

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

ON ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

OFF ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

MULTIPLE

SWITCH 10 6 5 1

MAIN 00000 01111

A 00111 00000

B 00000 00000

C 00000 00000

D 00000 00000

JIG OFFSET

X 1.234

Y 0.123

Z 0.012

Updated feature overview

Updated machining

management data

becomes valid

M99;

4-160

2. Making an updating program

Make an updating program into a configuration that allows a macro-program to

be called using a subprogram unit of a MAZATROL program.

(1) MAZATROL program to be used for call

A calling program must be made as follows. Otherwise, the machine will

operate incorrectly.

Macroprogram

Calling program configuration

Machining unit

End-of-process unit

Subprogram unit

End-of-process unit

Maching unit

Calling up the write macro-

program

M99;

Process 1

Each subprogram unit

ends with an end-of-

process unit

Process 2

Make a calling program so that each subprogram unit ends with an end-of-process

unit, as shown in the diagram above.

Also, set the subprogram units as follows:

- Setting the subprogram units

[1] Call the following menu and press the menu key OTHER.

POINT

MACH-ING

LINE

MACH-ING

FACE

MACH-ING

MANUAL

PROGRAM

OTHER WPC OFFSET END SHAPE

CHECK


M CODE SUB

PROGRAM

MMS DRUM

CHANGE

PALLET

CHANGE

INDEX PROCESS

END

[2] Press the menu key SUB PROGRAM .

- The cursor blinks at WORK NO. item.

UNO UNIT WORK NO.

SUB PRO

- The menu display will change over to the following menu.

MEASURE

MACRO

4-161

[3] Press the menu key MEASURE MACRO .

[4] Set a write macro program number using the numeric keys.

- The workpiece number is displayed yellow in the WORK NO. item.

UNO UNIT WORK NO.

SUB PRO 1234

[5] When using an argument(s), move the cursor to the ARGM item and set an

argument(s) using the numeric keys.

UNO UNIT WORK NO. ARGM

SUB PRO 1234

- Supplementary description

The following lists restrictions, and the reasons, as to the making of a calling

program:

Restriction 1 The write macro calling subprogram unit must end with an end-

of-process unit.

Reason The NC performs data check and other pre-processing operations

on a machining program process basis. If a write macro-program

is not separated as one process, therefore, pre-processing will be

performed on all subsequent machining units including skipped

units before write operations are performed. This will result in an

abnormal machine action even if the UNIT SKIP SWITCH data is

set to ON.

Restriction 2 The menu key MEASURE MACRO menu key must be pressed to

set a subprogram unit workpiece number.

Reason The NC pre-reads the selected machining program. When

machining management data is to be written, pre-reading must be

stopped immediately. The NC stops the pre-reading operation on

execution of the subprogram unit that you have set after pressing

the menu key MEASURE MACRO .

Note:

Special processing must be done to restart from the stopped status of pre-reading

by the NC. Do not use the menu key MEASURE MACRO , except when the usage

is clearly indicated.

4-162

(2) Write macro-program

Writing uses special system variables. System variables for various types of

machining management data are listed in the table below.

Machining management data and system variables

Data nameSystem variables

numberSetting

UNIT SKIP SWITCH #50443 Decimal, without decimal point

MULTI FLAG MAIN #50441 Decimal, without decimal point

MULTI FLAG A #50435 Decimal, without decimal point

MULTI FLAG B #50433 Decimal, without decimal point

MULTI FLAG C #50431 Decimal, without decimal point

MULTI FLAG D #50429 Decimal, without decimal point

JIG OFFSET X #50449 (mm), decimal, with decimal point

JIG OFFSET Y #50447 (mm), decimal, with decimal point

JIG OFFSET Z #50445 (mm), decimal, with decimal point

Note:

Since UNIT SKIP SWITCH data and MULTI FLAG data are both binary bit data,

they must be converted into decimal data when set.

Example:

To write 0000001111 into the UNIT SKIP SWITCH data area, set the data as

follows:

#50443=15; (15= 23×1+22×1+2×1+1)

System variables for various types of data have been listed above. Writing is not

performed just by setting data for these variables. To let the NC perform write

operations, system variables for write control must be further set. Write control

system variables are listed in the table below.

Write control system variables

DescriptionSystem variables

numberSetting

Write data valid flag #50467 Decimal, without decimal point

bit 0: UNIT SKIP SWITCH valid

bit 1: MULTI FLAG MAIN valid

bit 2: MULTI FLAG A valid

bit 3: MULTI FLAG B valid

bit 4: MULTI FLAG C valid

bit 5: MULTI FLAG D valid

bit 6: JIG OFFSET X valid

bit 7: JIG OFFSET Y valid

bit 8: JIG OFFSET Z valid

Write start request flag #50499 Decimal, without decimal point

bit 1: Write start request

4-163

Notes:

1. Since system variables #50467 and #50499 are both decimal data, binary bit

data must be converted into decimal data when setting.

Example:

To write only UNIT SKIP SWITCH data and MULTI FLAG A, set the data as

follows:

#50467=5 ; (=000000101)

2. Since other features also use it, system variable #50499 must be set as follows

for identification:

#50499=#50499 OR 2;

3. System variable #50499 must be set at the end of a macro-program.

Sample: Write macro-program

UNIT SKIP SWITCH (Decimal) ON

= 307 (Decimal)

MULTIPLE SWITCH MAIN = 15 (Decimal)

MULTIPLE SWITCH A = 224 (Decimal)

JIG OFFSET X 1.234

JIG OFFSET Y 0.123

JIG OFFSET Z 0.012

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

! !! !!

(0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 )

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0

As shown above, make a macro-program for updating the current machining

management data if required.

End-of-process unit

Subprogram unit

End-of-process unit

# 50467 = 0;

# 50443 = 307;

# 50467 = #50467 OR 1;

# 50441 = 15;

# 50467 = #50467 OR 2;

# 50435 = 224;

# 50467 = #50467 OR 4;

# 50449 = 1.234;

# 50467 = #50467 OR 64;

# 50447 = 0.123;

# 50467 = #50467 OR 128;

# 50445 = 0.012;

# 50467 = #50467 OR 256;

# 50499 = #50499 OR 2;

M99;

%

Main program Macro program

4-164


UNIT SKIP SWITCH 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

ON ! ! ! ! !

OFF! ! ! ! !

MULTIPLE SWITCH 10 6 5 1

MAIN 00000 01111

A 00111 00000

B 00000 00000

C 00000 00000

D 00000 00000

JIG OFFSET

X 1.234

Y 0.123

Z 0.012

3. Machine action

Use the following parameter to select whether the write feature is to be made

valid or invalid;

Set “0” to make the write feature invalid.

Set “1” to make the write feature valid.Machine parameter L52

Even when the write feature is made valid, writing will be performed only when

external CPU operation or scheduled operation (see Note 2 ) is performed. If the

write feature is made invalid or if wrong macro-program data is set, writing will not

occur (the machine will stop together with the display of an alarm 192 EXECUTION

IMPOSSIBLE ).

Notes:

1. Even when the alarm occurs and writing is not performed, the machine action

will not stop if the menu key MEASURE MACRO was not be pressed when

using subprogram unit for calling the write macro-program.

2. External CPU operation and scheduled operation refer to the following types of

operation:

- External CPU operation

Automatic operation with machine parameter L54 set equal to 1 (Pallet-ID-

based operation controlled by a CPU external to the NC)

- Scheduled operation

Schedule-mode-based automatic operation with machine parameter L54 set

equal to 2

4-165

4-15 EIA Program Monitoring Functions (Option)


The following three functions are available on the PROGRAM MONITOR display:

1. Operational status check

Further detailed operational status of the machine is checked.

2. Monitoring

The currently active program block is displayed purple in highlighted form on

the displayed program list.

3. Program start position designation

Any position on the displayed program list where you want to start the program

can be designated using the cursor keys. This designation makes the entire

previous modal information ineffective.

The monitoring and program start position designation functions are valid only for

EIA/ISO programs. The monitoring function, however, becomes valid when an

EIA/ISO program is called as a subprogram from a MAZATROL program.

The program start position designation function cannot be used for subprograms.

4-166

- NOTE -

(4-167)

4-15-2 PROGRAM MONITOR display

* * * PROGRAM MONITOR * * *! EIA / ISO

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

“ POSITION

X -99999.999

Y 0.

Z 0.

4 0.

5 0.

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

” MACHINE

X -99999.999

Y 0.

Z 0.

4 0.

5 0.

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

‘ WORK NO. 9999 ( )

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

’ UNIT NO. 99999 [ ]

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

÷ BLOCK NO. 99 [ ]

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

◊ TOOL OFFSETD #(!0)!!!!0H #(!0)!!!!0

ACTIVE DATA

G# 1

20

50

69

49.1

17

40

54

97

91

49

64

15

23

80

67

50.1

94

98

17.1

M# !0

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

RPM(1) 100000

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

M/MIN 0

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

MM/MIN 0

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

MM/REV 0

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

LOAD METER

SPINDL 0%

X-AXIS 0%

Y-AXIS 0%

Z-AXIS 0%

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

ÿ TNO. 12345678a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

Ÿ PKNO. 1

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

⁄ PALLET NO. 1

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

HEAD NO. 1

( )

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

— PROGRAM

N200 G0X100. 001Y100. 001Z100.001 ;

S2300M3M8X12.939Y22.222F.01 ;

Z-999.999 ;

N300 G28Z0 ;

N400 G0X100.001Y100.001Z100.001 ;

S2300M3M8X12.939Y22.222F.01 ;

Z-999.999 ;

N500 G28Z0 ;

N600 G0X100.001Y100.001Z100.001 ;

S2300M3M8X12.939Y22.222F.01 ;

Z-999.999 ;

N700 G28Z0 ;

N800 G0X100.001Y100.001Z100.001 ;

S2300M3M8X12.939Y22.222F.01 ;

START P.

APPOINT

SEARCH

MONIT.PWORK NO. SEARCH

≠

≠

Ø

Ø

POSITION

SETPROGRAM

COL.

STOP

M3S125

4-168



— PROGRAM — Program monitor display

Fourteen lines of the active program data are displayed.

MAZATROL programs are not displayed.

POSITION X, Y, Z mm (inch) Current position of the tool tip in the workpiece coordinate system

POSITION 4, 5 Degrees ( ° ) or mm(inch)

Current position of the tool tip in the workpiece coordinate system(when an additional axis is provided)

MACHINE X, Y, Z mm (inch) Current position of the machine in the machine coordinate system

MACHINE 4, 5 Degrees ( ° ) or mm(inch)

Current position of the machine in the machine coordinate system(when an additional axis is provided)

WORK NO. — Workpiece number of the program currently being executed

( ) — If a subprogram is currently being executed, the workpiece number of

that subprogram will be displayed in parentheses.

UNIT NO. — Number of the unit currently being executed

[ ] — If the unit currently being executed is a five-face unit or a face

definition unit, the number of the unit will be displayed in brackets.

BLOCK NO. — Sequence number currently being executed

[ ] — If the sequence currently being executed is a five-face sequence or a

face definition sequence, the number of that sequence will be

displayed in brackets.

TOOL OFFSET D# — Tool diameter compensation value.

The tool diameter compensation number is displayed in parentheses.

TOOL OFFSET H# — Tool length compensation value.

The tool length compensation number is displayed in parentheses.

ÿ TNO. — Spindle tool number

A group number, if specified, is displayed instead.

Ÿ PKNO. — Spindle tool number

⁄ PALLET NO. — Number of the pallet being used (This data is displayed only when a

pallet change function is provided.)

HEAD NO. — Number of the spindle head being used (This data is displayed only

for five-face machining specification.)

RPM rpm Revolutions per minute

( ) — The gear number is displayed in parentheses.

M/MIN (FT/MIN) m/min (feet/min) Circumferential speed of the spindle

MM/MIN (IN/MIN) mm/min (inch/min) Feed rate per minute

MM/REV (IN/REV) mm/rev (inch/rev) Feed rate per spindle revolution

LOAD METER SPINDL % Load on the spindle motor

LOAD METER X-AXIS % Load on the X-axis servo motor

LOAD METER Y-AXIS % Load on the Y-axis servo motor

LOAD METER Z-AXIS % Load on the Z-axis servo motor

ACTIVE DATA G# — Currently valid G-code in all modal groups

ACTIVE DATA M# — Currently valid M-code

MAZATROL or EIA/ISO — Indicates whether the program currently being executed is a

MAZATROL program or an EIA/ISO program.

‘

÷

’

◊

“

”

4-169

Procedure for calling up the PROGRAM MONITOR display:

[1] Press the display selector key (green key located to the left of the menu keys)

until the following menu has been displayed:

EIA/ISO

INFORM.

MODAL

INFORM.

ALARM PROCESS

CONTROL

MEASURE MONITOR ARRANGE EIA/ISO

COMMAND

HARD

COPY

[2] Then, press the menu key MONITOR.

[3] The following menu will then be displayed.

POSITION COMMAND TRACE PROGRAM

MONITOR

MODAL

INFORM

ALARM EIA/ISO

COMMAND

Press the menu key PROGRAM MONITOR. The PROGRAM MONITOR

display will then be presented.

4-15-3 Description of the monitoring function

1. Reverse display colors

X100. Y100. ;

Blue: Indicates the program start block existing in a reset status of the

machine or indicates the block which has been specified as the start

position using the program start position designation function.

Purple: Indicates the block that has been selected when restarting the

program or indicates the currently active block.

2. Menu key description

The following menu is displayed on the PROGRAM MONITOR display:

WORK NO. START P.

APPOINT

SEARCH ≠

≠

Ø

Ø

POSITION

SET

PROGRAM COL.

STOP

SEARCH

MONIT. P

WORK NO.: Use this menu data to select a workpiece number for

which monitoring or program start position designation is

to be done.

START P. APPOINT : Use this menu data to designate the program start

position after moving the cursor to the program start

position. For details see subsection 4-15-4.

SEARCH: Use this menu key to search the program for a character

string. The length of the character string which can be

searched for is up to 39 characters. To check further

details of the searching method, refer to the description

of chapter 7. EIA/ISO PROGRAM , given in the

programming manual for MAZATROL M-32.

4-170

Use this menu key to call the previous or next page.

Fourteen lines of program data can be displayed on a

page.

≠Ø ≠Ø

:

POSITION SET: Use this menu key to set the current position. For

further details, see “2. Re-setting the current position”,

given in subsection 4-10-1 TOOL OFFSET DATA

display .

PROGRAM: Use this menu key to call the WK. PROGRAM display

on the screen.

COL. STOP (option): Use this menu key to set the collation stop function. For

further detais, see section 2-9 COL. STOP, given in the

operation manual for MAZATROL M-32 automatic

operation.

SEARCH MONIT. P: When the page is changed over under a reset status,

control will return to the starting block of the program or

the page corresponding to the block which has been

specified as the start position.

Notes:

1. Workpiece number search, start position designation, data search, page

feed, current position setting, and monitoring position search can be used

only under a reset status.

2. Start position designation, data search, page feed, current position setting,

and monitoring position search can be used only for EIA/ISO programs.

3. Display of the currently active block

One line of currently active block is displayed purple in reverse form.

Example:

G00Z50.;

X–100. Y–100. ;

Z0;

If the block consists of multiple lines, only the first line will be displayed in

reverse form.

4-171

4. Display form and screen scrolling

Up to fourteen lines of the active program data are displayed on the left hand of

the screen (one line contains up to 38 characters).

End

Displayed blue in reverse form under areset status

PROGRAM

G00X0Y0Z0 ;G01X-100.F1000 ;Y100. ;Z-10. ;

.

.

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

G90G80G54 ;

The reverse display color changes fromblue to purple. During its execution, thestarting block of the program isdisplayed on line 1.

PROGRAM

G00X0Y0Z0 ;G01X-100.F1000 ;Y100. ;Z-10. ;

.

.

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

G90G80G54 ;

PROGRAMG90G80G54 ; G01X-100.F1000 ;Y100. ;Z-10. ;

.

.

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

G00X0Y0Z0 ;

PROGRAMZ-10. ;

M30 ;%

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

G90G80G54 ;

PROGRAMM30 ;%

When executionbegins

The display scrolls each time a block isexecuted. The active block isdisplayed on line 2.

The display becomes blank afterexecution of the ending line of theprogram.

When operation is completed, the ending line of theprogram will move to the top of the display. Whenthe first page is called up, the starting block of theprogram will be displayed blue in reverse from.

Note:

If the reset key is pressed to terminate operation in the middle of the program,

the active block at that time will move to the top of the display.

4-172

5. Subprogram display

For a program using subprogram calling, the subprograms will be presented on

the PROGRAM MONITOR display when execution is transferred to those

subprograms.

Also, the main program will be displayed when execution is returned from the

subprograms to the main program.

PROGRAM

G00X0Y0Z0 ;

G01X-100.F1000 ;

Y100. ;

Z–10. ;

.

.

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

G90G80G54 ;PROGRAM

Z–10. ;

X100. ;

M98P1000 ;

Main program Subprogram No. 1000

Calling

subprogram

6. Moving the cursor

The cursor keys vertically move the cursor through the left

end of the displayed program.

If the cursor is positioned at the top of the displayed program, pressing further

the cursor keys will display the next page. If the cursor is positioned at the

bottom of the displayed program, pressing further the cursor keys will display

the previous page.

4-172-1

4-15-4 Program start position designation function

Function:

The program start position designation is used to designate any block from which

you want to start the program on the PROGRAM MONITOR display. This function,

unlike the restart function, ignores all program contents presented before the

designated block. Modal information must therefore be set before executing a

program using this function.

1. Designating a program start block

Designate a program start block as follows:

[1] Move the cursor to the block where you want to designate.

PROGRAM

G90G80G54;

G00X0Y0Z0;

01X 100. F1000;

Y100.;

G

[2] Press menu key START P. APPOINT :

WORK NO. START P.

APPOINT

SEARCH ≠

≠

Ø

Ø

POSITION

SET

PROGRAM COL.

STOP

SEARCH

MONIT.P

- The block indicated by the cursor will move to line 1 and will be displayed

blue in reverse form to indicate the start position.

PROGRAM

Y100;

Z 10.;...

G01X 100.F1000;

Note:

- To cancel the designation, press the reset key. Cancellation by display

changeover cannot be made.

- To change the designation, move the cursor from that block to the desired

one and press the menu key START P. APPOINT once again.

4-172-2

2. Differences from the restart function

Although both the restart function and the program start position designation

function can be used to restart a program in the middle, the operation of the

machine differs significantly.

Restart functionProgram start position designation

function

Program data is calculated from the head of the

program up to the designated block, and during

this time, modal information setting, program

error checking, etc. are performed.

Also, since the coordinates present before the

designated block have been stored, positioning

at those coordinates is performed before the

designated block is executed.

The entire program data before the designated

block is ignored, and the program is restarted

from that block, based on the modal information

valid during execution. Therefore, modal data

should be previously designated.

Example:

G90 G00 X0 Y0 Z0;

X100.; This block is designated.

Restart function Program start position designation function

Movement at dry run feedrate

Execution of designated block

X 0 Y 0 Z 0

Execution of designated block

M3S052

X 100. Y 0 Z 0

X 100. Y 0 Z 0

X 0 Y 0 Z 0

Notes:

1. If the start block is designated using the restart function, that block cannot be

changed directly with the program start position designation function. The

designated block must be reset in such a case.

2. If the start block is designated using the program start position designation

function, that block can be changed directly with the restart function.

4-172-3

4-15-5 Notes

Use program monitoring function with care to the following.

1. The active block during automatic operation is displayed purple in reverse form

on line 2. If, however, the active block is the starting block of the program, that

block will be displayed on line 1.

2. During automatic operation, one line of the block data immediately preceding

the active block data is displayed and if the preceding block consists of two

lines, only the first line of data will be displayed. The preceding block will not

be displayed if it consists of three lines or more.

3. The monitoring display of the active program can be made only during memory

operation. The active program, therefore, is not displayed during tape

operation, MDI operation, or HDLC operation.

4. When a macro statement is displayed, the first space may be automatically

deleted and then displayed in left-justified form.

5. When block skip is specified, the skip-specified block will be displayed during

execution of the block succeeding that skip-specified block.

Example:

If block skip 1 is set:

PROGRAM

G01X-100. F1000 ;

Z-10. ;

X100. ;...

/1Y100. ; Skip-specified block

Active block

6. Programs whose display has been inhibited using the program management

functions are not displayed. Refer to section 4-22 Program Management

Function , for further details of the program management functions.

If a display-inhibited program is called up as a subprogram from the main

program, block “M98” of the main program will be displayed during execution

of the display-inhibited program.

Example:

PROGRAM

G01X-100. F1000 ;

Z-10. ;

X100. ;...

M98P9000 ; Display during execution

No. 9000 denotes a display-inhibited

program.

7. If operation is stopped during execution of a subprogram, the subprogram will

remain intact on the display.

4-172-4

4-17 On-machine Measurement (Option)


The MAZATROL M-32 system has three measurement functions:

- Automatic alignment—Can be used only for a MAZATROL program.

- Measurement print-out—Can be called up with a user macro to measure hole

pitches, slopes, etc. and print out the results. This function works only for a

machining program.

- On-machine measurement—Can be used in the manual mode.

Both automatic alignment and measurement print-out work with a program,

whereas on-machine measurement allows both dimensional measurement and

results display in the manual mode. With on-machine measurement, therefore, you

can easily perform measurements without preparing a program when machining

setup or dimensional measurement after machining has taken place. Since it

presents coordinates display in addition to dimensional display, the on-machine

measurement function can also be used for workpiece alignment.

4-17-2 Use of on-machine measurement

The on-machine measurement capability is designed for measuring work

dimensions and provided with alignment function.

1. Work dimension measurement

Items below can be measured.

- Diameter of circular shape and center coordinate value

- Surface workpiece coordinate value, slope gradient with respect to machine

coordinate axis

- Surface straightness, slope gradient with respect to machine coordinate axis

Measurement will be allowed in combination with the result of three items

above.

— Center to center distance of circular shape

“ Distance between circular shape and surface

” Surface to surface distance, parallelism, straightness, slope gradient

4-176

NM210-00446

— Center to center distance “ Circle center to surface distance

” Surface to surface distance

2. Alignment function

For alignment with other than on-machine measurement capability, MDI•MMS

function is provided. This is used to measure X-Y, X-Z, Y-Z plane coordinate

values. If work origin is at the center of a hole, measurement is impossible.

Further, MDI•MMS is exclusively used for program WPC measurement, and so

it is not used to make coordinate confirmation only. Although MAZATROL MMS

unit can be used for this measurement procedure, program preparation time is

required. For alignement with on-machine measurement capability, coordinate

value of measurement point, center coordinate value of circular shape, and

slope gradient of surface can be shown, and WPC measurement with work

origin at the center of a hole can be accomplished.

4-177

4-17-3 Measurement pattern

Measurement patterns are available in five types as below.

- Circle measurement . . . . . . . . . . . Diameter and center coordinates of hole/boss

- Surface measurement . . . . . . . . . Surface coordinates, slope gradient

- Straightness measurement . . . . Straightness between two arbitrary points

- One-point measurement . . . . . . . Reference surface coordinate (on the measure-

ment axis)

- Two-point measurement . . . . . . . Groove/Step center coordinate (on the measure-

ment axis)

In addition, combinations of the leading three measurement patterns above can be

used to calculate distance, gradient, parallelism, and straightness.

1. Circle measurement (Three measurement points)

(1) Measuring procedure

- Measurement points A, B, and C can be positioned arbitrarily. (Three

points must be at different positions.)

- Measurement direction (touch sensor movement direction) must be one of

the axial directions (simultaneous two axes must not be used). In ±Z

direction, however, alarm will be made.

- Circle measurement is allowed only on X-Y plane.

- Z coordinate at points A, B, and C must be identical. If Z coordinate value

exceeds set parameter L12, alarm will be indicated, but measurement is

possible.

M3S054

A

BC

X

Y

M3S055

Z

XPoint APoint B

ParameterL12

4-178

2. Surface measurement

For surface measurement, surface to be measured must be parallel to either of

X-, Y- or Z-axes.

(1) Surface nomenclature

If the selected surface is parallel to the X-axis, that surface is referred to as

the X-axis surface. Likewise, if the selected surface is parallel to the Y-axis

or the Z-axis, that surface is referred to as the Y-axis surface or the Z-axis

surface, respectively.

M3S056

Z

X Y

Z

X YParallel to X-axis

ØX-axis surface

Parallel to Y-axisØ

Y-axis surface

Parallel to Z-axisØ

Z-axis surface

Z

X Y

(2) Selection of measurement surface

Which surface should be measured is determined from measuring JOG

direction and coordinates of two points on the surface. The following

describes the procedure.

1) Two axial surfaces are determined by JOG direction.

2) Axial surface is determined from comparison of point to point distance in

axial component.

Example:

JOG in X direction

Ø

Distance component: iz>iy

Ø

Y-axis surface selected

M3S057

Z

X Y

iz

iy

4-179

(3) Angle selection

Angular data for various axial surfaces should be as below.

1) X-axis surface . . . . . . . . . . . CCW angle from +Y-axis on YZ plane

(150° in example below)

2) Y-axis surface . . . . . . . . . . . CCW angle from +Z-axis on ZX plane


3) Z-axis surface . . . . . . . . . . . CCW angle from +X-axis on XY plane


M3S058

Z

X Y

X-axis surface Y-axis surface Z-axis surface

Z

X Y

Z

XY

-30°

150°

160°

-20°

-45°

135°


- Measurement points A, B should satisfy parameter L12fi. If L12<i,

alarm will be caused, but measurement is possible.

- Measurement direction (touch sensor movement direction) must be one of

the axial directions (simultaneous two axes must not be used).

- Measurement movement direction for measurement points A, B must be

identical. Different directions will cause alarm.

M3S059

Z

X Y

Ai

B

4-180

3. Straightness measurement

(1) Selection of axial surface

Selection of axial surface is similar to that of surface measurement.

(2) Angle selection

Angle must be determined from a line approximated by the least square

method.


M3S060

1 2 · · · · · · n

A B

· · · · · ·

- After manual measurement of A and B, points 1 – n will be measured

automatically. The number of measurement points n must be entered by a

measuring operator. (1ene30)

- Measuring procedure is similar to that of surface measurement.

4. Distance, angle, parallelism, straightness

- Up to two items can be stored as data. Distance, angle, parallelism, and

straightness between two data items can be calculated and indicated.

- For calculation of parallelism and straightness, value will be indicated always

with data 1 as base.

4-17-4 MEASURE display

The MEASURE display must be called to use the on-machine measurement

function.

The procedure for calling up the MEASURE display is as follows:

[1] Press twice in succession the display selector key. The following menu will be

displayed.

EIA/ISO

INFORM.

MODAL

INFORM.

ALARM PROCESS

CONTROL

MEASURE HARD

COPY

[2] Press the menu key MEASURE.

- The MEASURE display shown on the next page will be presented.

4-181

Data of the MEASURE display:

M3S067’

POSITIONXYZ

MACHINEXYZ

HEAD NO.( )

HEAD ANGLE( )

WNO. UNO. SNO.(Ÿ) (⁄) ( )XYk

Z456

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

MES. POS.

X

Y

Z

RESULT!1:XYZk

D

1

a aa aa aa a

2

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

3

2: DISTANCE ANGLEMM/MIN

ELEMENTXYZ

PAR.PERP. ( )

MM

%

CIRCLE

MEASURE

SURFACE

MEASURE

STRAIT.

MEASURE

1 POINT

MEASURE

STRAIT.

GRAPH

2 POINT

MEASURE

CLEAR

RESULT

COPY

RESULT

WRITE

* * * MEASURE * * *( )

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

”

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

—

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

“

’‘

’ ÷

÷

ÿ

◊



— POSITION Current coordinates

“ MACHINE Machine coordinates

” MES. POS. Coordinates of the measurement point in the machine coordinates system

‘ RESULT Results of measurement. The selected measurement pattern is displayed after “1:” and “2:”

Types of measurement patterns—CIRCLE, X PLANE, Y PLANE, Z PLANE, X STRAIT., Y

STRAIT., Z STRAIT, X STDRD, Y STDRD, Z STDRD, X CENTR, Y CENTR, Z CENTR

(and XY CRCL, YZ CRCL and XZ CRCL for 5-surface machining)

Circlemeasurement

Surfacemeasurement

Straightnessmeasurement

One-pointmeasurement

Two-pointmeasurement

XYZ

Center coordinates(Z: Z-coordinate ofthe first measurementpoint)

Center coordinatesof two points.

Center coordinatesof the start andend points.

Reference surfacecoordinate (on themeas. axis).

Center coordinate(on the meas.axis) of two points.

k No display Angle data Angle data No display No display

D Diameter data No display Degree ofstraightness

No display No display

4-182


DISTANCE Linear distance between two measurement points. This field remains blank if the distance has not

been calculated.

ELEMENT Each axial components of the distance between two measurement points

ANGLE Angle difference between two surfaces

PAR. PERP.MM%

- The degrees of parallelism and straightness are displayed in “mm” terms, and the angle differencebetween two surfaces is displayed in “%” terms.

- The angle is calculated only for the same axis surface (straight surface). This field remains blank ifthe angle has not been calculated.

- The degrees of parallelism and straightness are calculated only when the two surfaces are parallel(the angle difference is equal to, or within ±180 of, the L13 parameter data) or straight (the angledistance is within ±90 of the L13 parameter data).

◊ - Each measurement pattern is graphically displayed at the same time that one measurementpattern (excepting One/Two-point meas.) is selected on the menu.

Circle measurement Surface measurement Straightness measurement

- During automatic measurement of the degree of straightness, the current number of measurementpoints is displayed as follows:B/A (A: Total number of measurement points, B: Current number of measurement points)

MM/MIN Jog feedrate in mm/min. Jog feed is based on the data of parameter K41.

( ) “ON” status of the skip signal. Turning the sensor to “ON” displays a red box (#) in theparenthesized position.

Ÿ WNO. Work No. (or workpiece origin G54 to G59 for EIA/ISO) as destination of coordinates writing (*)

⁄ UNO. Unit No. as destination of coordinates writing (*)

SNO. Sequence No. as destination of coordinates writing (*)

X, Y,

k, Z,

4, 5, 6

Coordinate of each axis

HEAD NO. No. of spindle head (Only for 5-surface machining)

HEAD ANGLE Angle of spindle head (Only for 5-surface machining)

Distance-calculatable pattern Conditions

Circle to circle None

Circle and the Z-axis surfaceCircle and the degree of straightness with respectto the Z-axis

None

Circle and the X-Y axis surfaceCircle and the degree of straightness with respectto the X-Y axis surface

The surface is parallel to the Z-axis (but withinthe data range of parameter L13).

Same axis surface as each axis surfaceSame degree of straightness as that of each axis

Two surfaces are equal in angle (but within thedata range of parameter L13).

Axis surface different from each axis surfaceStraightness of axis different from that of each axis

Two surfaces are parallel (but within the datarange of parameter L13).

’

÷

M3S062

a aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a

·····

ÿ

Writing dataregistrationarea

(*) Used for coordinates writing. Refer to 4-17-10 for further details.

4-183

4-17-5 Measuring procedure

Measuring procedure is outlined below.

Measuring pattern

selection by menu

Touch sensor movedclose to measurementpoint by manual feed

Contact made

by JOGEnd

Manual pulse, jog, rapid feed mode JOG mode

(MDI: During Straightnessmeasurement)

1. Circle measurement

M3S063

Manual

Manual

JOG

JOG

JOG

JOG

[3rd point]

[2nd point]

Manual

[1st point]

JOGJOG

Operation

CIRCLE MEASUREselected

1st pointmeasurement

2nd pointmeasurement

3rd pointmeasurement

Jog feed

Jog feed

Jog feed

End

Result

Reversal display of menu

Graphic indication of measurement pattern

Message FIRST POINT MEASURING

Indication of 1st point measurement coordinates

Target coordinate indication (Z coordinate)

Message SECOND POINT MEASURING

Indication of 2nd point measurement coordinates

Target coordinate indication (Z coordinate)

Message THIRD POINT MEASURING

Indication of 3rd point measurement coordinates

Measurement results indication

Graphic cleared

Reversal display of menu goes out.

4-184

2. Surface measurement

M3S064

JOG

[1st point]

Manual

JOG

[2nd point]

Manual

Operation

SURFACE MEASUREselected



Jog feed

Jog feed

End

Result


Graphic indication


Indication of 1st point measurement coordinates

Target coordinate indication


Indication of 2nd point measurement coordinates


Graphic cleared


4-185

3. Straightness measurement

M3S065

JOG

Manual Manual

JOG JOG JOG

Automatic

Operation

STRAIT. MEASUREselected

Start pointmeasurement

End pointmeasurement

key selected

Jog feed

Jog feed

Jog feed

Result


Graphic indication

Message REQUEST STARTING POINT

Indication of start point measurement coordinates

Message REQUEST FINAL POINT

Indication of end point measurement coordinates

Message SELECT MDI MODE

Message INP. NUMBER OF MEASURING

POINT?

* Menu unchanged

Specify the measurment point using numeric

key(s) and press the input key.

Message PUSH CYCLE START BUTTON



MDI

Number +

Start button

End

4-186

4. One-point measurement

JOG

JOG

Manual

Operation

1 POINT MEASUREselected

One pointmeasurement

Jog feed

Result


Message MOVE TO THE MEASURING POINT

Indication of coordinate of the measured point



4-186-1

5. Two-point measurement

JOG JOG

JOGJOG

ManualManual

[1st point] [2nd point]

Operation

2 POINT MEASUREselected


Jog feed

Result



Indication of 1st measurement point coordinate


Indication of 2nd measurement point coordinate




Jog feed

4-186-2

4-17-6 Mode and menu changeover

1. Function selector key

Function selector keys to be used during measurement are encircled below.

Measurement impossible in this mode(automatic mode).Measurement cancelled if pressed duringmeasurement.

NM210-00447

MDI mode to be used for straightnessmeasurement in automatic operation only.In other cases, identical with automatic mode.

Function to be used inmanual mode (except MDImode)

(1) Manual mode

- All operation in the manual mode can be used during touch sensor

movement.

- With contact at measurement point, cutting feed key only can be

used. If skip signal comes on in other modes, alarm will be caused.

(Measurement pattern is not cancelled.)

(2) TAPE, MEMORY mode ( , )

- Measurement is not allowed in this mode. Alarm will be caused if the

pattern selection key is pressed.

- If TAPE, MEMORY mode is selected during measurement, the

measurement operation will be cancelled.

(3) MDI mode ( )

- This can be used only when mode change message is given in

straightness measurement. In other cases, identical with other automatic

operation modes.

4-187

2. Menu selection

The basic menu on the MEASURE display is shown below. The following

describes the menu selection in each mode.

CIRCLE

MEASURE

SURFACE

MEASURE

STRAIT.

MEASURE

1 POINT

MEASURE

STRAIT.

GRAPH

2 POINT

MEASURE

CLEAR

RESULT

COPY

RESULT

WRITE MD

Displayselectorkey

Menuselectorkey

(1) Menu selection in manual mode

Display selector key . . . . . Charge to ordinary display menu.

Basic menu on the MEASURE

display cannot be called.

Menu selector key . . . . . Return to measurement basic menu.

Pressing this on basic menu on the

MEASURE display will not cause

change.

D

M

(2) Menu selection in automatic mode

Identical with menu selection in manual mode

(3) Menu selection in MDI mode

Display selector key . . . . . Change to ordinary picture menu.

Basic menu on the MEASURE

display cannot be called.

Menu selector key . . . . . Identical with menu selection on the

COMMAND display.

D

M

4-188

4-17-7 Data storage

1. Measurement result storage

Example:

After X straightness measured when 1: CIRCLE 2: X PLANE, subsequent

measurement will erase data for “1:”, transfer data in “2:” to “1:”, and store

new data in “2:”.

Indication will be as follows.

1: X PLANE 2: X STRAIT.

2. Data deletion

A. MES. POS.

- The coordinates of MES.POS. will be erased by two methods as follows.

1) Change display. (Measurement pattern will also be cancelled.)

2) Press either one of the menu keys of measurement pattern CIRCLE

MEASURE, SURFACE MEASURE , STRAIT. MEASURE , 1 POINT

MEASURE or 2 POINT MEASURE.

B. RESULT

The procedure for erasing the displayed measurement results is described

below.

[1] Press the menu key CLEAR RESULT on the MEASURE display.

- The message CLEAR MEASURING RESULT NO.? is displayed.

[2] Using numeric key, specify 1 or 2 that corresponds to the data number

of RESULT item to be erased and then press the input key .

- Data of the selected number is erased.

- If the data of “1:” is erased, data of “2:” will not move to the field of

“1:” even when the data of “2:” exists; data obtained by the next

measurement operation will move to the field of “1:”. The order of

subsequent data movement is the same as that described previously in

item 1.

C. DISTANCE, ANGLE

Distance and angle data will also be erased upon erasing of measurement

results (RESULT).

4-17-8 Graph of straightness data

All measurement results will be indicated by numeric values on the

MEASURE display. In addition, straightness data will be graphically shown on

a line graph. The measurement results and graph can be copyed. This graph

is selected by pressing STRAIT. GRAPH on the basic menu of the

MEASURE display. It is explained below.

4-189

STRAIGHTNESS GRAPH display:

M3S066

COMMENT MANUAL

MEASURE

PAR.

PERP.

DRAW

GRAPH 1

DRAW

GRAPH 2

* * * STRAIGHTNESS GRAPH * * *( )

146.792 293.584

0.030

0.015

-0.015

-0.030

A-01

1. Initial state of the STRAIGHTNESS GRAPH display

This display is initialized as below according to measurement operation.

(1) Straightness measurement data not stored in either “1:” or “2:”

- Graph frame is only shown.

- No character is indicated.

(2) Straightness measurement data in either “1:” or “2:”

- Line is drawn on graph with horizontal axis passing start and end points of

straightness data.

- Dimensions are shown.

(3) Straightness data in both “1:” and “2:”

- Graph for data “2:” will be drawn in a manner similar to (2) above.

2. Menu data function

Menu of the STRAIGHTNESS GRAPH display.

COMMENT MANUAL

MEASURE

PAR.

PERP.

DRAW

GRAPH 1

DRAW

GRAPH 2

(1) MANUAL MEASURE

Direct return from the graph to the MEASUR display.

4-190

(2) PAR. PERP.When surface, straightness measurement data in “1:”, and straightnessmeasurement data in “2:” and parallelism and straightness are calculablebetween these two data, data “1:” is taken as reference on horizontal axis,on which graph for data “2:” can be drawn. In other cases, this is notavailable.

(3) DRAWN GRAPH 1 , DRAWN GRAPH 2DRAWN GRAPH 1 for showing the first straightness graph, and DRAWNGRAPH 2 for the second straightness graph. If no data for straightnessmeasurement is specified, these are not available.

(4) COMMENTComment input is allowed with up to 11 characters of alphabet andnumerals at top right on the display.

3. Notes(1) Vertical scale is two times the data scale (max).

(2) Graph coordinate system is identical with machine coordinate system with(+) right direction of X-axis and (+) upward direction of Y-axis.

4-17-9 Five-surface machining option

Function:The five-surface machining option allows you to perform circle measurements onan X-Z plane and a Y-Z plane. It also allows measurement in a +Z direction.

Five-surface measurement(1) Measurement results display

Five-surface measurement presents the following two types of circlemeasurement results display:

M3S068

Z

Y

X

XY circle YZ circle

Y

Z

X

Note:To which circle the particular measurement results relate is automaticallyidentified and displayed by the NC according to the direction of skipping doneduring the measurement operation, and the corresponding coordinates.

4-191

(2) Mounting direction of a touch sensor tool

With the five-surface machining option, you can mount a touch sensor tool in

any of five directions. Measurements can be performed, irrespective of the

direction in which the touch sensor tool has been mounted.

Z-axis surface measurement

(Possible with the touch sensor tool mounted in any of the five directions)M3S069

Y

Z

X4

31

2

4

3

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

1

2

(3) Measurements compensation

Five-surface measurement uses the following four types of compensation data:

- Touch sensor tool misalignment compensation (Parameter)

- Touch sensor tool measurements compensation (Parameter)

- Touch sensor tool length compensation (TOOL DATA display)

- Head compensation (HEAD DATA display)

The NC equipment automatically reads the head number, the direction of

measurement, and the direction of skipping, and thus performs appropriate

compensations, irrespective of what type of measurement takes place. The

following describes each type of compensations.

1) Touch sensor tool misalignment, measurements, and length compensations

Misalignment compensation and the measurements compensation must be

set as parameters. Five types of misalignment compensations are available

according to the particular head angle (mounting direction of the touch

sensor tool), whereas only one type of measurements compensation is

provided. The five-surface machining option uses the touch sensor tool

length compensations registered in the MAZATROL data.

- Measurements compensation

X-direction: Machine parameter L3

Y-direction: Machine parameter L4

- Alignment compensation. . . machine parameter

Head angle (Mounting direction of the touch sensor tool)

No head V-direction 0° 90° 180° 270°

X-direction L1 L84 L86 L88 L90 L92

Y-direction L2 L85 L87 L89 L91 L93

4-192

* All parameter data is in 1/10000 mm.

* The X- or Y-direction at the head angle of 0, 90, 180, or 270 degrees

refers to the X- or Y-direction existing in the MAZATROL five-surface

machining coordinate system.

M3S070

Y z

X

z

Zz

z

a aa aa aa a

z

x

a aa aa aa a

xx

x

y

yy y

y

X, Y, Z : Machine coordinatesystem

x, y, z : MAZATROL five-surfacemachining coordinatesystem

MAZATROL five-surface machining coordinate system

x

2) Head compensations

The five-surface machining option uses the data registered on the HEAD

DATA display.

Correction axis conversion takes place automatically according to the

current head angle.

4-17-10 Coordinates writing function

The coordinates writing function allows coordinate data to be written from the

MEASURE display into the fundamental coordinate units, work offsets, and/or

additional fundamental coordinates. The following describes the writing procedure.

Set the required data on the positions Ÿ to of the MEASURE display to apply

the function.

WNO UNO SNO(Ÿ) (⁄) ( )

XYk

Z

456

Select where you want the coordinates to bewritten.

Set the coordinates to be written. Writing canbe done only for the axes with specifiedcoordinates.

4-193

1. Writing position selection in Ÿ, ⁄ and

A. To write the coordinates into a fundamental coordinate (WPC) unit:

WNO UNO SNO(9999) ( 1) (--)

Move the cursor to the position ( ) of WNO.,

UNO. or SNO.

Set the machining program number using the

numeric keys and press the input key.

Set the fundamental coordinate unit number using

the numeric keys and press the input key.

No setting is required (It will be ignored even if

setting is done).

B. To write the coordinates into five-surface machining surface-sequence:

WNO UNO SNO(9999) ( 1) ( 1)

Set the machining program number using the

numeric keys and press the input key.

Set the five-surface machining unit number using

the numeric keys and press the input key.

Set the five-surface machining surface-sequence

number using the numeric keys and press the input

key.

C. To write the coordinates into a work offset (WORK OFFSET DATA display):

WNO UNO SNO(G54) (--) (--)

Select one from G54 to G59 on the menu*.

After you have selected one from G54 to G59, you

cannot move the cursor to the position “(--)” of

UNO. and SNO.

D. To write the coordinates into additional fundamental coordinates (ADDITIO-

NAL WPC display):

WNO UNO SNO( A) (--) (--)

Select one from A to K on the menu*.

After you have selected one from A to K, you

cannot move the cursor to the position “(--)” of

UNO. and SNO.

* The following menu is displayed if you have moved the cursor to WNO:

G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 G59 A B ÆÆÆ

4-194

- To set the data required for specification of work offset or additional

fundamental coordinates, use the above and the following menu which can

be alternatively displayed by pressing the ÆÆÆ menu key:

C D E F G H J K ÆÆÆ

2. Coordinates

You can input the required coordinates in this section either

- by copying the results of measurement (refer to 4-17-11), or

- by manually inputting the data.

Note that the coordinates copied or manually set here (for axis address “X” to

“6”) are to be written as they are into the respective item of the specified data

type.

A. Menu for coordinates setting

The following menu will be displayed when the cursor is placed on any one

of the coordinate data lines “X” to “6”.

INCR. ALL

CLEAR

(1) Setting for coordinates shifting (INCR. menu function)

You can set desired increments for the coordinates that have been set in

this section.

[1] Place the cursor onto the line of the axis whose data is to be

incremented.

[2] Press the menu key INCR.

- The display of INCR. will then be reversed in red.

And the message LENGTH TO ADD ? will be displayed.

[3] Set the required increment and press the input key .

- The coordinate incremented by the specified value will be displayed

on the line maked with the cursor, and the red-highlighted status of

the menu will be cleared.

(2) Clearance of the entire writing data (ALL CLEAR menu function)

The data in the writing data registration area can be cleared either

- by clearing the data items marked with the cursor one by one with the

data cancellation key, or

- by clearing the entire data (Ÿ to ) with the menu function ALL CLEAR .

The procedure for applying the menu function is as follows:

[1] Place the cursor onto a coordinate item in the writing data registration

area.

4-195

[2] Press the menu key ALL CLEAR.

- The display of ALL CLEAR will then be reversed in red.

And the message ALL SPACE CLEAR <INPUT> will be displayed.


- The entire data in the writing data registration area will then be

cleared, and the red-highlighted status of the menu will also be

cleared.

B. Precautions

- Do not set any unnecessary data for the axis whose data is not required to

be updated.

3. Writing operation

- The following describes the procedure for writing.

[1] Move the cursor to each item on the MEASURE display and set each data.

Example:

WNO UNO SNO(9999) ( 1) ( )

X 300.001Y 350.002k 0.001Z 400.003456

[2] Press the menu key WRITE.

- This will cause the display status of WRITE to reverse.


- The data set in procedural step [1] will be written.

- Writing will be completed when the red-highlighted status of the menu is

cleared.

4. Precautions

- Writing cannot be done during the measurement mode.

- An alarm will result if the designated position (machining program, unit or

sequence) cannot be found.

- In case of coordinates writing for a WPC unit or five-surface machining

surface-sequence which has additional fundamental coordinates (A to K) or

work offset (G54 to G59) assigned, updating will be carried out, after

cancellation of the assignment, only for the data of the respective unit or

sequence (that is, not even for WPC-A to -K or G54 to G59).

4-196

4-17-11 Measurement results copying function

A menu function is provided for copying the measurement results into the writing

data registration area.

1. Copying procedure

[1] Select the item COPY RESULT from the basic menu on the MEASURE

display.

CIRCLE

MEASURE

SURFACE

MEASURE

STRAIT.

MEASURE

1 POINT

MEASURE

STRAIT.

GRAPH

2 POINT

MEASURE

CLEAR

RESULT

COPY

RESULT

WRITE

- The menu display will be changed to the following menu for the results

copying function:

RESULT

1-X

RESULT

1-Y

RESULT

1-Z

RESULT

1-k

RESULT

2-X

RESULT

2-Y

RESULT

2-Z

RESULT

2-k

And the message RESULT TO COPY <MENU Æ INPUT> will be

displayed.

[1] Select the menu item(s) indicating the data to be copied.

The item indications of the menu consist of the measurement No. (1 or 2)

on the left and the axis address (X to k) on the right of a hyphen. As many

items as required can be selected fere.

- The display of the selected menu item(s) will be reversed in red.


- The measurement results selected in procedural step [2] will now be

copied into the writing data registration area, and the red-highlighted

status of the menu will be cleared.

2. Precautions

- The selection of measurement result for an axis can simply be renewed by

pressing the menu key for the other item of the same axis (the reverse

display in the menu will be changed correspondingly).

- The copying operation will only be carried out for the menu-selected axes to

update the coordinates (all the other lines will remain as they were).

Note that a blank item (no measurement result) in the RESULT display

section, if menu-selected, will be copied as it is into the writing data

registration area.

4-197

4-18 Workpiece measurement printout system (Option)


M3S071

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a aa a a a a a a a a a a a a


a a a

a a a

a a a

a a aMeasurement

Target

Touch sensor

End mill

a aa aa aa aa aa a




a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

Target

a aa aa aa a

MAZATROL

Measurement

Tolerancejudgment

Compensation

Printout

Compensation data

Error

Workpiece No.

Target value

Measured value

Printer

NM210-00448

The workpiece measurement printout system has been developed to take

automatic measurements of hole and boss radius, groove and step width, center to

center distance, step differences and other distances between randomly selected

points, angles of slant and the like, and to provide printouts of the results of these

measurements.

When the printout is made, the system will compare the actual measured value

with the target value and judge whether or not the results fall within the tolerance

range. It will also output the results of this judgment. Further, it will also

automatically conduct tool data compensation when measurement is made of a

surface machined by an end mill.

These functions can be used by embedding a designation for calling a macro

program for the execution of workpiece measurement printout within normal

machining programs that have been written either in MAZATROL programming

language or in EIA/ISO code. This type of application will allow the preservation of

initial machining accuracy as well as the rapid discovery of any non-conforming

parts.

The optional function “EIA/ISO code input” must be present to use this system.

4-198

1. Measurement function

Random workpiece lengths or angles are measured by the touch sensor tool. A

wide variety of measurement patterns are available for selection. Patterns

available are described in the following charts.

Measurement group Measurement patterns

ID and OD

Inner diameter Outer diameter

Groove and

step width

Groove width Step width

Surface

X and Y surfaces Z surface

Groove and

step center

Groove center Step center

Hole and

boss center

Hole center Boss center

Outside and

inside corners

Outside corner Inside corner

A. Diameter/width measurement:

Designate center coordinate system

and target diameter and width.

B. Measurement between 2 random

points:

Any two points can be selected and

measurement can be made between

them. For surface, groove or step

center, hole or boss center or corner

measurement. Depending on the type

of point combination selected,

measurement can be made for step

difference, from center to center, and

between hole center and surface.

C. Slant measurements:

Measurement of two points on the

surface and calculation of angle from

axis.

* Angle can be measured from points on

the X and Y surface; the X and Z

surface; or the Y and Z surface.

Angle of inclination

Measurement patterns



w



w

a aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a

Xa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a

Y



Z











a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a












a

M3S072

d d

4-199

Examples of measurement between two randomly selected points:

X-surface to X-surface (step) Step center X to X-surface

Groove center X to groove center XHole center to hole center

(distance between centers)

Hole center to outside corner Outside corner to outside corner

a aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a a aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a

lx

P1

P2


P2

a aa aa aa aa aa a

a aa aa aa aa aa a

lxP1

aaaaaaa

aaaaaaa

a aa aa aa aa aa aa a


lx

P1 P2

P2

P1 lr

lx

ly

P1

lx

a aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a

P2

lrly

lx

aaaaaaaaaaaaa

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a


P2


aaaaaaaaaaaaa

ly

P1

lr

M3S073

- The number of machining cycles to be conducted between measurements is

designated by a parameter setting.

2. Tolerance judgment function

M3S074

Upper tolerancelimit (u)

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

-u-v

2

u-v2 u-v

2q ×

u-v2

-q ×Target value

Lower tolerancelimit (v)

4-200

Tolerance judgments are conducted at three stages. These are the upper tolerance

limit (u), the lower tolerance limit (v) and the compensation range setting rate (q).

Notes:

1. The value of “q” is designated by an argument in the workpiece measurement

initial setting program (WNO. 9100).

2. The values of “u” and “v” are designated by arguments in the tolerance

judgment printout program (WNO. 91 5).

3. Range : Tolerance judgment is “OK” and no compensation is necessary.

Range : Tolerance judgment is “OK” but a alarm message will be printed

out.

If offset tool designation has been made, compensation will be

conducted towards the target value.

Range : A tolerance over alarm will be given, and no compensation will be

made.

The target value will automatically be established to fall exactly in the middle of

the range established between the upper and lower tolerance limits.

Example:

ID measurement arguments X Y Z D100.

Tolerance judgment arguments U0.1 V0

100.05 is target value.

When q = 0.4

100.1 (+0.05)

100.07 (+0.02)

100.05 (Target value)

100.03 ( 0.02)

100. ( 0.05)

M3S075

z100+ 0.10

4-201

3. Compensation function

TOOL DATA display

DRUM NO. 1

PKNO. TOOL ACT- ø LENGTH

1 F-MILL 100.A 100. 100.

2 E-MILL 20.A 20. 100.

3 DRILL 10. ! 100.

4 E-MILL 10.A 10. 100.

5

6

7

Tool diameter

Tool length

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

NOM- ø

TOOL OFFSET DATA (TYPE A) display

NO. OFFSET NO. OFFSET

1 50. 17 0.

2 10. 18 0.

3 5. 19 0.

4 20. 20 0.

5 · 21 ·

6 · 22 ·

7 · 23 ·

8 · 24 ·

Offset data

Designation of the tool number and the offset number of the end mill that was used

on the measured surface allows compensation to be made in the relevant tool

diameter, tool length and offset data.

Compensation for OFFSET DATA can not be made when setting TOOL OFFSET in

type B. Designation of whether compensation is to be made to the TOOL DATA

value or to the TOOL OFFSET DATA value is made by parameter setting.

(1) Diameter and width measurement

Compensation direction is determined automatically. The system compares the

target value with the measured value, and makes compensation along the

minus direction if undercutting has been detected, and compensation along the

positive direction if overcutting has been detected.

4-202

(2) Measurement between 2 randomly selected points

The compensation direction cannot be determined automatically, and it is thus

necessary to supply an argument that can be used for selection. If no argument

has been supplied, compensation will be made along the positive direction. See

the explanations of the various programs for further details.

(3) Slant measurement

The compensation function is not available for this type of measurement.

Note:

Compensation for TOOL DATA value can be made only for C version and the

subsequent version of main software.

4. Printout function

The printout function can be controlled in any of three different ways, depending

on parameter settings. These are indicated below:

(1) Printout not required

This selection is made when the system is to be operated with the

measurement, tolerance judgment and compensation functions only, or when

printer failure or some other reason makes it impossible to use the printer.

Measurement results can be verified at the COMMON VARIABLE display if no

printout is to be made.

(2) Printout each measurement

This selection should be made if it is necessary to make a printout of every

measurement taken, regardless of results.

(3) Printout compensation

This selection should be made if it is necessary to print out only the results of

tolerance judgments when error has been found to fall within the compensation

range or to exceed tolerance. If this selection is made, however, the results of

the first measurement taken will be printed out regardless of results. (This

selection is controlled by the results of tolerance judgments, and has no

relationship to whether the offset tool designation is ON or OFF).

A maximum of eight items can be included in the printout for a single

measurement.

An example follows. (Example assumes metric input and surface point to

hole/boss center point measurement.)

4-203

RESULT OF MEASURING

— Workpiece number, workpiece count . . . WNO 5678 COUNT 1

“ Target value, measurement pattern . . . . MARK DATA FACE-HOL/BOS

60.000

” Measured value, direction of

measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MEASURED DATA X 60.053

‘ Tolerance range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TOLERANCE 0.100

’ Error, tolerance judgment results . . . . . . CHECK OK/WARNING 0.053

÷ Compensation tool No. or

compensation offset No. . . . . . . . . . . . . OFFSET NO. 30

◊ Pre-compensation tool data or

offset data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFFSET DATA 10.000

ÿ Post-compensation tool data or . . . . . . . NEW OFFSET DATA 9.947

offset data

See Chapt. 4-18-7 Output of measurement results for further information on the

data that is printed out at this time.

4-18-2 System configurations

1. Hardware

M3S076

5

6

7

Printer

1

2

3

4

8

No. Part name No. Part name No. Part name

1 Touch sensor tool 4 Signal check panel 7 MMS receiver

2 Pendant operation box 5 Signal cable 8 Printer cable

3 CRT display 6 NC unit (MAZATROL)

The workpiece measurement printout function is composed of the following

components: a touch sensor tool that is brought into contact with the measurement

surface; a MAZAK measuring system (MMS) receiver that receives contact signals

from the touch sensor; the MAZATROL NC unit, which reads coordinate values

when contact is made between the touch sensor and the measurement surface;

and a printer, which prints out the results of the measurement.

See the Programming manual, for further details on the touch sensor tool.

4-204

2. Printer

1

2

43

5

6 7 NM210-00449

No. Part name No. Part name

1 Printer cover 5 Power connector

2 Paper cutter 6 Interface connector

3 PF switch 7 DIP switches

4 Power switch

The printer used in this system is an Epson P-40 printer, which is interfaced with

the NC unit using PTP/PTR connector.

(1) Principal specifications

Item Description

Type of printing Heat sensitive serial dot matrix printer

Printing speed 45 cps (for normal characters in 40 col. mode)

Lines per second Approximately 1.2 lines per second

Paper for use Epson thermal roll paper (P40TRP), thermal roll paper (luminous

black); width 112 mm/ roll length 11 meters

Power supply Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-phase NiCd batteries

External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC adaptor available

Dimensions and weight 46(H)x216(W)x128(D) mm, 650g

See the printer operating manual for a more detailed specifications.

(2) Setting of printer DIP switches and NC parameters

1) Set NC parameters as follows:

- F39 (port selection): Set 1 (macro-print).

- F41 (device selection): Set 1 (macro-print).

- G19 (PTP/PTR baud rate): Set the same value as that of the printer.

- G20 G23: Standard setting when shipping is maintained.

2) Set the printer DIP switches following the printer operation manual.

- Data length: 7 bit

- Parity: EVEN

- Baud rate: Set the same value as that of NC parameter G19.

4-205

4-18-3 Parameter registration

Before attempting to utilize the workpiece measurement printout function, it is

necessary to first register in the common variables the parameter settings which

designate the data management system to be used and the compensation amount

of touch sensor tool.

COMMON VARIABLE display :

M3S077

NO.

#100

#101

#102

#103

#104

#105

#106

#107

#108

#109

#110

#111

#112

DATA NO.

#113

#114

#115

#116

#117

#118

#119

#120

#121

#122

#123

#124

#125

NO.

#126

#127

#128

#129

#130

#131

#132

#133

#134

#135

#136

#137

#138

NO.

#139

#140

#141

#142

#143

#144

#145

#146

#147

#148

#150

DATA DATA DATA

COMMON

VARIABLE

COMMON

CHECK

LOCAL

VARIABLE

LOCAL

CHECK

EXP NEXT

PAGE

* * * COMMON VARIABLE * * *

Procedure for calling up the COMMON VARIABLE display:

[1] By depressing the menu selection key (green key positioned at the left side of

the menu key), the following menu will be indicated.

EIA/ISO

INFORM. MODAL

INFORM.

ALARM PROCESS

CONTROL HARD

COPY

[2] By depressing the menu key EIA/ISO INFORM. the following menu will be

displayed.

TOOL

OFFSET

WORK

OFFSET

MACRO

VARIABLE

TOOL

LIFE

[3] By depressing the menu key MACRO VARIABLE , the COMMON VARIABLE

display will be shown automatically.

- By depressing the menu key NEXT PAGE, the display will be changed to the

next page. Move the cursor to where the data must be registered.

4-206

1. Data management system parameters

Item Address Value to register

Mesurement/cycle #500 Register number of cycles in which measurement is

to be made. If #500 is set at “0”, no measurement

will be made at all.

Printout categories #501 0. = no printout

1. = printout each measurement

2. = printout first measurement, then subsequent

measurements if compensation is made or

tolerance level is exceeded

Compensation

categories

#502 0. = Conduct tool data compensation (Effective for C

version and the subsequent version)

1. = Conduct tool offset data compensation

Touch sensor tool

number

#503 Tool number registration of touch sensor tool

Example:

Tool No. 15 : #503 = 15

Offset number #504 Set a touch sensor tool length offset register No.

Example:

Set a touch sensor tool length offset register No. at

macro variable #504, and input the touch sensor tool

length in the number. (Input value may be the same

as the touch sensor tool length given on the TOOL

DATA display.)

TOOL OFFSET display

If offset register no. 2 is used at a touch sensor tool

length of 150, set the value 150 as shown above,

and besides set offset no. 2 at macro variable #504.

#504 = 2.

MAZATROL tool data

Effective/Ineffective

#510 When the main version belongs to C version and

F93 bit1 (MAZATROL tool data tool length Effective)

is made effective, set #510 = 1.

Set #510 = 0. except the above.

ATC type #511 0 ... H-400 type

Model which requires 2nd zero point return (G30)

when designating a tool change

1 ... AJV type

Model which doesn't require 2nd zero point return

(G30) when designating a tool change

Touch sensor tool

nominal diameter

#554 Assuming nominal diameter of 5 mm:

Metric . . . . . . . . . . . . . #554 = 2.5

Inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . #554 = 0.0984

NO. OFFSET NO. OFFSET1 0. 17 .2 150. 18 .3 0. 19 .4 . 20 .5 . 21 .

4-207

Refer to section 4-6-2 Tool data “INVALIDATION” (Option) for MAZATROL tool

data tool length/tool diameter Effective (in EIA/ISO program).

F92 bit 7 ON: MAZATROL tool data tool diameter Effective

F93 bit 3 ON: MAZATROL tool data tool length Effective

F94 bit 2 ON: Tool length compensation cancel is not performed by G28, G30.

(When F93 bit 3 is set to ON, be sure to set it to “compensation cancel is not

performed”.)

F84 bit 0 ON: Enter tool offset value into the counter by EIA/ISO.

2. Touch sensor tool compensation amount

M3S078“A” View Tool shank center

Stylus ball contact circle center

2 · My

ex

ey

2 · Mx

A

Eccentricity compensation values “ex” and “ey” and measurement compensation

values“Mx” and “My” must be registered as common variables before any attempt

is made to use the touch sensor to measure a workpiece.

Execution of calibration measurement by the MAZATROL MMS (automatic

centering system) will cause these compensation amounts to be displayed as

“parameter measurements” at the Parameter display. Input the values displayed at

addresses L1 through L4 as common variables #550 through #553, respectively.

Compensation amount Parameter mesurement

Address Metric Inch

Parameter common variable

Address Metric Inch

Eccentricity

compensation amount ex

L1 58 23 #550 0.0058 0.0023

Eccentricity

compensation amount ey

L2 1690 67 #551 0.169 0.0067

Measurement compensation amount

Mx

L3 24150 9510 #552 2.415 0.0951

Measurement compensation amount

My

L4 24277 9590 #553 2.437 0.0959

See the M-32 Programming manual (Application) for further information on the

calibration measurement operation.

4-208

4-18-4 Program configuration

The workpiece measurement printout function is used by adding a macroprogram

call command to the main program. Before this program is called out, however, it is

necessary to designate the workpiece coordinate system.

Tool exchange commands for the touch sensor are executed by the workpiece

measurement initial setting program, and they do not have to be added to the main

program.

1. Coordinate system setting

Coordinate system setting for workpiece measurement should be made

according to the procedures used with the MAZATROL programming language.

In other words, the coordinate value for the Z-axis should be the distance from

the spindle nose at the machine zero position, and the length of the touch

sensor tool should be registered as tool data.

EIA/ISO program: Set with codes G54 through G59 and G92.

MAZATROL program: Set with basic coordinate unit. However, “k” values

will not be effective. It should also be noted that the

miscellaneous coordinate unit will also be ineffective.

2. Macro program calls

EIA/ISO program: Use G65 user macro unmodal call

G65!P!WNO! ! ! ! ! ! ;

Argument address

Argument data

MAZATROL program: Use subprogram unit

UNO UNIT WORK NO. REPEAT ARGM 1 ARGM 2 ARGM 3 ARGM 4 ARGM 5

XX SUBPRO WNO. 1 ! ! ! ! !

Argument address

Argument data

The argument data are effective down to four decimal places. Any fraction will

be rounded off to four decimal places.

4-209

3. Macro program

The workpiece measurement printout system is made up of the 15

macroprograms indicated in the following table. The program necessary for the

measurement pattern to be executed should be selected.

Group Work No. Type of measurement Argument address

Initial setting 9100 Workpiece measurement initial

setting

W R K Q

9110 ID/OD measurement M X Y Z D

9111 Groove/step width

measurement

M X Y Z D

9115 Tolerance judgment printout A U V S

9120 Surface measurement M X Y Z

9121 Groove center/step center

measurement

M X Y Z D

9122 Hole center/boss center

measurement

M X Y Z D

9123 Corner measurement M X Y Z I

9125 Tolerance judgment printout B E U V S B

9130 Slant measurement F M X Y Z

9135 Tolerance judgment printout C I A U V

9140 Data check sub-routine

9141 Measurement movement sub-

routine

9142 Tolerance judgment and

compensation sub-routine

9145 Printout sub-routine

Measurement A

(Diameter and width)

Measurement B

(Measurement between two

random points)

Measurement C (Slant)

Sub-routines

The initial setting program (Work No. 9100) is always necessary when using the

work measurement function. Select the desired measurement pattern from

measurement groups A, B or C. The tolerance judgment printout program (Work

No. 91 5) should be the one from the group from which the measurement

pattern has been selected. Sub-routines are used within the system, and cannot

be directly used in a user program.

(1) Diameter and width measurement

Measurement Group A

9100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Workpiece measurement initial setting

9110, 9111 . . . . . . . . . . . Diameter or width measurement

9115 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tolerance judgment printout A

4-210

(2) Measurement between 2 random points

Measurement Group B

9100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Workpiece measurement initial setting

9120, 9121, 9122, 9123 . . Measurement point 1 coordinate value

9120, 9121, 9122, 9123 . . Measurement point 2 coordinate value

9125 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tolerance judgment printout B

A total of 10 different combinations is possible for workpiece numbers 9120 through

9123, depending on the designation of arguments at measurement points 1 and 2.

No.Program

combinationMeasurement pattern Direction

Compensation

setting (Note 1)

1 9120 - 9120 Surface to surface X, Y, Z }

2 9120 - 9121 Surface to groove/step center X, Y {

3 9120 - 9122 Surface to hole/boss center X, Y {

4 9120 - 9123 Surface to corner X, Y }

5 9121 - 9121 Groove/step center to

groove/step center

X, Y ¥

6 9121 - 9122 Groove/step center to hole/boss

center

X, Y ¥

7 9121 - 9123 Groove/step center to corner X, Y {

8 9122 - 9122 Hole/boss center to hole/boss

center

X, Y, R

(Note 2 )

{

9 9122 - 9123 Hole/boss center to corner X, Y, R

(Note 2 )

{

10 9123 - 9123 Corner to corner X, Y, R

(Note 2 )

}

Notes:

1. The following symbols are used in this chart:

} : All measurement systems can be compensated

{ : Center measurement taken as standard for compensation

¥ : Compensation designation not possible

2. X, Y and R (= X2 + Y2) tolerance judgment printouts can be selected foreach measurement at Nos. 8, 9 and 10. (More than one printout is alsopossible.)

Measurement Group B

9100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Workpiece measurement initial setting

9122, 9123 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measurement point 1; hole/boss center or

corner coordinate values measurement

4-211

9122, 9123 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measurement point 2; hole/boss center or

corner coordinate values measurement

9125 (X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-axis direction tolerance judgment printout B

9125 (Y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y-axis direction tolerance judgment printout B

9125 (R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance on X-Y surface

(R = X2 + Y2) tolerance judgment printout B

(3) Slant measurements

Measurement Group C

9100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Workpiece measurement initial setting

9130, 9135 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slant measurement; tolerance judgment print-

out C (always pair these two)

(4) Multiple group measurements

- It is possible to designate measurements to be made from each group (A, B,

and C) within the same main program. In such cases, the workpiece

measurement initial setting program is necessary only once, at the beginning.

9100

Measurement A1

Measurement A2

Measurement A3

Measurement A

Measurement B

Measurement C

Measurement A1

Measurement B

Measurement A2

9100 9100

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

Workpiece measurement will be discontinued if an alarm is generated as a result of

tolerance judgment.

- Group B measurements are normally composed of a cycle containing three

programs:

1) Measurement point 1 coordinate value measurement

2) Measurement point 2 coordinate value measurement

3) Tolerance judgment printout

When more than one location is being measured, however, and one

measurement point is to be duplicated, it is possible to make tolerance

judgments from only one coordinate value measurement from the second

measuring cycle on.

4-212

9100

9120 - 9123 . . . . Measurement point 1 (P1) coordinate value measurement

9120 - 9123 . . . . Measurement point 2 (P2) coordinate value measurement

9125 . . . . . . . . . Printout of tolerance judgment between points P1 and P2

9120 - 9123 . . . . Measurement point 2 (P2’) coordinate value measurement

9125 . . . . . . . . . Printout of tolerance judgment between points P1 and P2’

9120 - 9123 . . . . Measurement point 1 (P1’) coordinate value measurement

9125 . . . . . . . . . Printout of tolerance judgment between points P1’ and P2’

B1

B2

B3

{

{ {

P2

B1

P1

P2’ P1’

B2 B3{

- When machining is executed between measuring cycles:

9100

Measurement A1

Measurement A2

WNO. 9100 includes the touch sensor automatic toolchange function as well as the workpiece count function,and for this reason argument “Ww” (normally this is theworkpiece number) should be set at “0” for the secondand all subsequent instances of 9100, so that the countfunction will not be executed. Other arguments areunnecessary if they are unchanged from the initial 9100appearance, although it is also possible to change theirsettings.9100

Machining cycle

WO

(5) Examples for calling up a macroprogram

EIA/ISO programs

G54;

G65P9100W1200R5K3.Q0.5.;

G65 P9110 M101.X200.Y200.Z-5.D100.;G65P9115U0.1V-0.1S2.;

Note :

G90/G91 and F-code modal information is updated according to workpiece measurement.

Coordinate system setting

Workpiece offset G54 X 360.Y 450.Z 600.4 0

Work measurement initial setting

Measurement (example is ID)

Tolerance judgment, printout

4-213

MAZATROL program language program

UNO UNIT X Y k Z 4

XX WPC- 360. 450. k0 600 0


XX SUBPRO 9100 1 W1200. R5. K3. Q0.5


XX SUBPRO 9110 1 M101. X200. Y200. Z-5. D100.


XX SUBPRO 9115 1 U0.1 V-0.1 S2.

4-18-5 Explanations of programs

1. Workpiece measurement initial setting (WNO. 9100)

This program is responsible for the designation of common data to be used in

workpiece measurement, the initializing of common variables, workpiece

counting management and the automatic tool change operation for the touch

sensor. It should always be called out immediately before the beginning of any

measuring movement.

EIA/ISO G65 P9100 Ww Rr Kk Qq ;

MAZATROL UNOXX

UNITSUBPRO

WORK NO.9100

REPEAT1

ARGM 1Ww

ARGM 2Rr

ARGM 3Kk

ARGM 4Qq

ARGM 5UNO

Ww . . Workpiece number of main program

Example:

4078 Printout WNO 4078 COUNT 10MARK DATA HOL/BOS DIA 100.000MEASURED DATA R 100.799

However, if this is used in two or more locations in the main program,

the setting for the second and all subsequent times should be “W=0”.

Note:

For inch specifications, when calling up a macroprogram from a mazatrol

program, a workpiece number of four digits cannot be assigned to

argument W. Set either a workpiece number of three digits or less, or

any code.

Rr . . . Initial point Z used for measurement movement (workpiece coordinate

value)

Kk . . Measurement feed amount (positive value)

Qq . . Compensation field setting rate (0 to 1.0)

4-214

- Set range that will not result in compensation conducted as tolerance width 1.0.

- All argument data should contain decimal points.

With the exception of cases in which “W = 0” the counter will advance by 1 each

time the program is called up, and the counter will automatically be cleared to 0

when the workpiece number (value “w”) changes. If it is necessary to clear the

counter to 0 without changing workpiece numbers, set common variables #135

and #136 to 0.

- “Ww” designates a workpiece number, but no check is made to ensure that this

does not differ from the actual workpiece number. This is used in the heading

section of the printout, so it is also possible to use a different code setting at the

user's discretion.

- After an automatic tool change has been conducted for the touch sensor,

positioning will be made to the point designated by “Rr” and after this is done

feed will be made at a rate of 3000 mm/min (or 120 inch/min). The measurement

feed rate is made as a parameter setting (K41: G31 skip feed). Because

measurement is normally made successively, after one measurement cycle has

been completed, return is made to point R, which means that a zero return

command should be made after the final measurement has been completed (see

the various measurement programs).

- Measurement feed amount “Kk” is not calculated from the center of the spindle,

but rather represents the distance from the tip of the probe to the surface to be

measured.

This data is not effective during slant measurement.

M3S079

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a



kk

#554 (nominal radius of probe)

X, Y directions Z direction

When performing slant measurement, set the measurement start point in such a

way that it will be within 15 mm (0.6 inch) of the measurement point.

4-215

2. Inner diameter and outer diameter measurements (WNO. 9110)

Diameters are calculated by the measurement of four points on a circle.

Measurement is made first along the X-axis, then along the Y-axis.

EIA/ISO G65 P9110 Mm Xx Yy Zz Dd ;MAZATROL UNO

XXUNIT

SUBPROWORK NO.

9110REPEAT

1ARGM 1

MmARGM 2

XxARGM 3

YyARGM 4

ZzARGM 5

DdUNO

Mm . . Measurement pattern:

(1) m = 1.: ID measurement

(2) m = 2.: OD measurement

(3) m = 3.: ID measurement II

If a zero point return operation is to be made after all measurement operations

have been completed, these values should all be added to “100.” and, then, set

as follows: m = 101.; m = 102.; m = 103.

Xx . . . Center point of circle, X coordinate (workpiece coordinate value)

Yy . . Center point of circle, Y coordinate (workpiece coordinate value)

Zz . . Measurement point, Z coordinate (workpiece coordinate value)

Dd . . ID/OD target value

All argument data should contain decimal points.

4-216

>Measurement operations

m = 1. ID measurement m = 2. OD measurement

m = 3. ID measurement II

>Measurement pattern is determined inaccordance with the value of argument “m”as shown in the accompanying diagrams.

- The values of “r” and “k” are designatedin the workpiece measurement initialsetting program (WNO. 9100).

- ID measurement II is used when there is astep within a circle, such as in PCKT MTmachining.

x

y

Workpiece zero point



k

d

z

r

M3S082 M3S083

x

y

Workpiece zero pointa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a


a a a

a a a

a a a

r

z

k

d



a a a

a a a

a a a

r

z

k

x

y


a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a



a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

d


M3S084

4-217

3. Groove width and step width measurements (WNO. 9111)

Groove and step width are calculated by measuring both ends of the groove or

step section (along either the X-axis or the Y-axis direction).


XXUNIT

SUBPROWORK NO.

9111REPEAT

1ARGM 1

MmARGM 2

XxARGM 3

YyARGM 4

ZzARGM 5

DdUNO

Mm . . Measurement pattern:

(1) m = 1.: X-axis groove width measurement

(2) m = 2.: Y-axis groove width measurement

(3) m = 3.: X-axis step width measurement

(4) m = 4.: Y-axis step width measurement

If a zero point return operation is to be made after all measurement operations

have been completed, add “100” to these values and, then, set as follows:

m = 101.; m = 102.; m = 103; m = 104.

Xx . . . When m = 1. or 3.: Center of groove/step, X coordinate (workpiece

coordinate value)

When m = 2. or 4.: Measurement point X coordinate (workpiece

coordinate value)

Yy . . When m = 1. or 3.: Measurement point Y coordinate (workpiece

coordinate value)

When m = 2. or 4.: Center of groove/step, Y coordinate (workpiece

coordinate value)

Zz . . Measurement point, Z coordinate (workpiece coordinate value)

Dd . . Groove or step width target value


4-218

- Measurement operations

m = 1. X-axis groove width measurement m = 2. Y-axis groove width measurement

m = 3. X-axis step width measurement m = 4. Y-axis step width measurement

M3S085

M3S086

x

y

a aa aa ak

z

d

a aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

r

x

y


a aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a

k

a aa aa aa a

z

a aa aa aa a

r

d

x

y



k

a aa aa aa a

z

a aa aa aa a

r

d

x

y

k

z

d

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a


r

4-219

- Values of “r” and “k” are designated in the workpiece measurement initial setting

program (WNO. 9100).

4. Tolerance judgment printout A (WNO. 9115)

This program compared the results of the measurements of inner diameters,

outer diameters, groove widths and step widths with the target values; makes a

tolerance judgment on the basis of this comparison, and prints out the results of

this judgment. Tool diameter compensation can also be made, depending on

the amount of error in measured values in respect to the target values.

EIA/ISO G65 P9115 Uu Vv Ss ;MAZATROL UNO

XXUNIT

SUBPROWORK NO.

9115REPEAT

1ARGM 1

UuARGM 2

VvARGM 3 ARGM 4 ARGM 5UNO

Ss

Ss

Uu . . Upper tolerance limit

Vv . . Lower tolerance limit

If measurement results are to be printed out without the performance of a

tolerance judgment, the setting of these first two values should be “u = v = 0”.

Ss . . The Tool No. or Offset No. for which compensation is to be made.

- Designation in a case where compensation category #502 = 0. and tool

number is to be set:

Example:

Tool No. 20 Æ S = 20.

(Since compensation is made for the currently effective drum, the drum number

has no meaning.)

- Designation in a case where compensation category #502 = 1. and offset


Exemple:

Offset No. 20 Æ S = 20.

- If compensation is unnecessary or not possible, make no input for “Ss” or set

at “S = 0”.

5. Surface measurement (WNO. 9120)

This program allows measurement between random surface workpiece

coordinate points. It is combined with other measurement patterns to calculate

distance to the surface.

EIA/ISO G65 P9120 Mm Xx Yy Zz ;MAZATROL UNO

XXUNIT

SUBPROWORK NO.

9120REPEAT

1ARGM 1

MmARGM 2

XxARGM 3

YyARGM 4

ZzARGM 5UNO

4-220

Mm . . Measurement point categories, measurement pattern (designated with

three digits: — “ ”).

— Hundreds integer: Establishes zero return category

0: R-point return after measurement operation is completed

1: Zero position return after measurement operation is completed

“ Tens integer: Establishes measurement point category

1: Measurement point 1

2: Measurement point 2

” Ones integer: Establishes measurement pattern

1: X surface measurement, measurement feed +X

2: X surface measurement, measurement feed X

3: Y surface measurement, measurement feed +Y

4: Y surface measurement, measurement feed Y

5: Z surface measurement, measurement feed Z

Xx . . . Measurement point X coordinate (workpiece coordinate value)

Yy . . Measurement point Y coordinate (workpiece coordinate value)

Zz . . Measurement point Z coordinate (workpiece coordinate value)


- Measurement patterns (“m1” corresponds to the ones integer of argument m)

M3S087







m1=3.

+Y

m1=4.

m1=2.

-Y

-X

m1=1.

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a+X

Y

Xa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a


-Z

m1=5.

Z

X

4-221


x

M3S088

a aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a

y

kX, Y surface (in the case of +X)

Workpiece zeroposition

Workpiecezeroposition

Z surface

x

y

a aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a

r

z

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a



r

zk

Values of “r” and “k” are designated in the workpiece measurement initial setting


6. Groove center and step center measurement (WNO. 9121)

This program measures both edges of grooves and step sections (in the X-axis

or Y-axis direction) and calculates the central coordinates of the groove or step

section from these measurements. It is combined with other measurement

patterns to calculate the distance to the groove or step section center.


XXUNIT

SUBPROWORK NO.

9121REPEAT

1ARGM 1

MmARGM 2

XxARGM 3

YyARGM 4

ZzARGM 5

DdUNO

4-222



— Hundreds integer: Establishes zero return category (identical to surface

measurement)

“ Tens integer: Establishes measurement point category (identical to

surface measurement)

” Ones integer: Establishes measurement pattern:

1: X-axis groove center measurement

2: Y-axis groove center measurement

3: X-axis step center measurement

4: Y-axis step center measurement

Xx . . . For measurement patterns 1 and 3: Groove/step center X coordinate

(workpiece coordinate value)

For measurement patterns 2 and 4: Measurement point X coordinate


Yy . . For measurement patterns 1 and 3: Measurement point Y coordinate


For measurement patterns 2 and 4: Groove/step center Y coordinate


Zz . . Measurement point Z coordinate

Dd . . Groove width, step section width


4-223


(“m1” corresponds to the ones integer in argument “m”)

m1 = 1. X-axis groove center measurement m

1 = 2. Y-axis groove center measurement

m1 = 3. X-axis step section center measurement m

1 = 4. Y-axis step section center measurement

M3S089

M3S090

x

y

a aa aa ak

z

d



r

x

y



a aa aa a

k

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

z

a aa aa a

r

d

x

y


a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a aa aa aa a

k

a aa aa aa a

z

a aa aa a

r

d

x

y

a aa aa ak

z

d



r

4-224



7. Hole center and boss center measurement (WNO. 9122)

This program calculates center coordinates (X and Y) by the measurement of

four points on a circle. Measurement is made first along the X-axis, then along

the Y-axis. It is combined with other measurement patterns to calculate the

distance to a hole or boss center.

EIA/ISO G65 P9122 Mn Xx Yy Za Dd ;MAZATROL UNO

XXUNIT

SUBPROWORK NO.

9122REPEAT

1ARGM 1

MmARGM 2

XxARGM 3

YyARGM 4

ZzARGM 5

DdUNO




measurement)


surface measurement)


1: Hole center measurement

2: Boss center measurement

3: Hole center measurement II (movement to initial point)

Xx . . . Circle center X coordinate (workpiece coordinate value)

Yy . . Circle center Y coordinate (workpiece coordinate value)


Dd . . Inner diameter/Outer diameter


4-225


(“m1” corresponds to the ones integer in argument “m”)

4-226

m1 = 1. Hole center measurement m

1 = 2. Boss center measurement

m1 = 3. Hole center measurement II

>Measurement pattern is determined inaccordance with the value of argument“m

1” as shown in the accompanying dia-

grams.- The values of “r” and “k” are designated

in the workpiece measurement initialsetting program (WNO. 9100).

- Hole center measurement II is used whenthere is a step within a circle, such as inPCKT MT machining.

M3S082 M3S083

M3S084

y




k

d

z

r

x



a a a

a a a

a a a

r

z

k

y


a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a




a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

d

x

y




a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

r

z

k

d

x

4-227

8. Outside and inside corner measurement (WNO. 9123)

This program performs continuous measurement along the X surface and Y

surface to calculate the corner coordinate value (X and Y). It is used in

combination with other measurement patterns to calculate the distance to the

corner.

EIA/ISO G65 P9123 Mn Xx Yy Za Ii ;MAZATROL UNO

XXUNIT

SUBPROWORK NO.

9123REPEAT

1ARGM 1

MmARGM 2

XxARGM 3

YyARGM 4

ZzARGM 5

IiUNO




measurement)


surface

measurement)


1: Outside corner; measurement direction +X, +Y

2: Outside corner; measurement direction X, +Y

3: Outside corner; measurement direction X, Y

4: Outside corner; measurement direction +X, Y

5: Inside corner; measurement direction X, Y

6: Inside corner; measurement direction +X, Y

7: Inside corner; measurement direction +X, +Y

8: Inside corner; measurement direction X, +Y

Xx . . . Corner X coordinate (workpiece coordinate value)

Yy . . Corner Y coordinate (workpiece coordinate value)


Ii . . . . Distance from corner to measurement point (plus value)


- Measurement patterns

(“m1” corresponds to the ones integer of argument m)

a aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a

M3S091

m1=2.m1=1.

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a




m1=3.m1=4.




m1=7.m1=8.

m1=6.m1=5.

a aa aa a

Y

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

X

Outside Corner Inside Corner

4-228


M3S092

x

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a


a aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a

y

i

i

Workpiecezero positon

a aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a




yi

i

x

Workpiecezero positon

Y

X

Outside Corner(in the case of m1 = 1.)

Inside Corner(in the case of m1 = 8.)


z

r

ki

a aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a

a a a a

a a a a

k

i

z

rZ

X



9. Tolerance judgment printout B (WNO. 9125)

This program compares the distances between measurement point 1 and

measurement point 2 as measured in combination with coordinate value

measurements (WNO. 9120 through 9123) with the target values; makes a

tolerance judgment on the basis of this comparison, and prints out the results of

this judgment. Tool diameter and tool length compensation can also be made,

depending on the amount of error in measured values in respect to the target

values.

EIA/ISO G65 P9125 Ee Uu Yy ;MAZATROL UNO

XXUNIT

SUBPROWORK NO.

9125REPEAT

1ARGM 1

EeARGM 2

UuARGM 3

VvARGM 4 ARGM 5UNO

Ss Bb

Ss Bb

4-228

Ee . . Distance and axis direction designations

e = 1.: Distance along X-axis

e = 2.: Distance along Y-axis

e = 3.: Distance along Z-axis

e = 4.: Distance from X-Y surface (|X2 + Y2)

Uu . . Upper tolerance limit

Vv . . Lower tolerance limit

If measurement results are to be printed out without the performance of a

tolerance judgment, the setting of these first two values should be “u = v = 0”.

Ss . . The Tool No. or Offset No. for which compensation is to be made.

- Designation in a case where compensation category #502 = 0. and tool


Example:

Tool No. 20 Æ S = 20.

(Since compensation is made for the currently effective drum, the drum

number has no meaning.)

- Designation in a case where compensation category #502 = 1 and

offset number is to be set:

Example:

Offset No. 20 Æ S = 20.

- If compensation is unnecessary or not possible, make no input for “Ss”

or set at “S = 0”.

Bb . . Compensation amount conversion coefficient

This data is effective only when compensation is made. If no input is

made, it will be treated as “b = 1.”.


4-229

- Compensation operation

b = 1. Inner compensation as seen from reference point b = -1. Outer compensation as seen from reference point

b = 0.5 Inner compensation on both surfaces b = -0.5 Outer compensation on both surfaces

M3S095 M3S096

a aa aa aa aa a

a aa aa aa aa a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

Measured distance

Diameter compensation tool

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a aa aa aa aa a

a aa aa aa aa a

Measured distance


M3S093

a aa aa aa aa aa a

a aa aa aa aa a

a aa aa aa aa a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

Diametercompensationtool

Z

X or Y

Measured distance

Referencecoordinatevalue

Coordinatevalue to becompensated

Tool compensation tool

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a



Reference coordinate value

Coordinate valueto be compensated M3S094

a aa aa aa aa aa a

a aa aa aa aa a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a aa aa aa aa a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a


a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

Referencecoordinate value

Coordinate valueto be compensated

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

Coordinate valueto be compensated

Referencecoordinate value

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

Tool compensation tool

Measured distance

4-230

10. Slant measurement and tolerance judgment printout C (WNO. 9130/9135)

This program measures two points on the workpiece surface and calculates the

angle of slant in respect to the surface axis; compares the results to a target

value to make a tolerance judgment, and prints out the result of this judgment.

EIA/ISOG65

G65

P9130

P9135

F1

Ii

Mm

Aa

Xx

Uu

Yu

Vv

Zz

;

;

UNOXX

UNITSUBPRO

WORK NO.9130

REPEAT1

ARGM 1Ff

ARGM 2Mm

ARGM 3Xx

ARGM 4Uy

ARGM 5Zz

XXUNIT

SUBPROWORK NO.

9135REPEAT

1ARGM 1

IiARGM 2

AaARGM 3

UuARGM 4

VvARGM 5

UNO

MAZATROLUNO

Ff . . . Selection of surface

f = 1.: X-Y surface angle measurement

f = 2.: X-Z surface angle measurement

f = 3.: Y-Z surface angle measurement

Mm . . Designation of measurement direction

m = 1.: Measurement feed direction is +X

m = 2.: Measurement feed direction is –X

The above two settings cannot be made when f = 3.

m = 3.: Measurement feed direction is +Y

m = 4.: Measurement feed direction is –Y

The above two settings cannot be made when f = 2.

m = 5.: Measurement feed direction is –Z

The above setting cannot be made when f = 1.

When a zero return is to be performed after the measurement operation has been

completed, add “100” to each of the above settings and set as follows:

m = 101.; m = 102.; m = 103.; m = 104.; m = 105.

Xx . . . Measurement starting point X coordinate (workpiece coordinate value)

Yy . . Measurement starting point Y coordinate (workpiece coordinate value)

Zz . . Measurement starting point Z coordinate (workpiece coordinate value)

Ii . . . . Movement amount in axial direction from measurement point 1 to

measurement point 2

The movement axis is automatically determined according to the

combination of “f” (surface) and “m” (measurement direction)

arguments.

Aa . . Target angle (degrees): Set at 45. e a e 45. (see Note below)

Axis and angle are both automatically determined according to the

combination of “f” (surface) and “m” (measurement direction)

arguments.

4-231

f:Surface

m:Measurement

direction

i:Movement

amount

a:Target angle

m = 1,2X-axis

Y-axis Angle withY-axis

m = 3,4Y-axis

X-axis Angle withX-axis

m = 1,2X-axis

Z-axis Angle withZ-axis

m = 5Z-axis

X-axis Angle withX-axis

m = 3,4Y-axis

Z-axis Angle withZ-axis

m = 5Z-axis

Y-axis Angle withY-axis

f = 1.

X-Y surface

f = 2.

X-Z surface

f = 3.

Y-Z surface

Uu . . Upper tolerance limit (degrees)

Vv . . Lower tolerance limit (degrees)

If tolerance check is not necessary, set as “u = v = 0”

Note:

If angle is greater than 45 degrees, change measurement direction to measure.

M3S097























































X m=4.a=60.

Y m=1.a=30.

ly























































30°

60°

Angle with X-axis = 60 deg. Angle with Y-axis = 30 deg.

Example:

Y

X

f=1.

60°lx

4-232


When f = 1. and m = 3. When f = 2. and m = 5.

M3S098 M3S099

z

r

i

(i>0)




















Workpiecezero position

x

yP1

P2

a

(a>0)

Workpiecezero position

x

ya a a a

a a a a

a a a a

P1 a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

P2

i

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

(i>0)


















a aa aa a

a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

(a<0)

rz

- The measurement start point should be set within 15 mm (0.6 inch) of the

measurement point.

M3S100












Measurement point

Measurements on X and Y axes

15 mm(0.6 inch)












Measurement point

Measurements on Z axis

15 mm(0.6 inch)

Start point

4-233

- The value assigned to l i l should be as large as possible.

The coordinate value of measurement starting point 2 is automatically determined

according to the measurement starting point, the axis movement amount and the

target angle. It is therefore especially important to take care about signs of axis

movement amount “i” and target angle “a”.

M3S101

a (+)

i (+)

P1

P2

a (-)

P1

P2

i (+)

a (+)P2

P1

a (-)

P2

P1

i (-)

a (-)

i (-)

- Defining the measured angle

(1) f = 1.; X-Y surface

ii

Measurement

directiona > 0 a < 0

m = 1.

+X

m = 2.

X

m = 3.

+Y

m = 4.

Y
























ai

jP1

P2

i

j

P1

P2



























a

j


























a

P1

P2

i

P1

P2




























a a a a a a a a a a a a aj

a


































i

a

j

P1

P2j





































a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aP2

a

P1

j

i P2

































P1

P1

P2

















j

i

a


















M3S102

i

a

j

4-234

“P1” is the measurement start point designated by arguments “x” “y” and “z”.

“P2” is determined automatically according to the values of arguments “i” and “a”.

In the above example, i > 0, but if the relationship were i < 0, then the positions

of P1 and P2 would be reversed.

The measured angle is determined by the following equation:

tan-1 j

i

(j: measurement point 2 coordinate value – measurement point 1 coordinate value)

(2) f = 2.; X-Z surface

Measurement


m = 1.

+X

m = 2.

X

m = 5.

Z i

j P2

































P1

P1

P2a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
















i

j

a


















M3S103

a


























ai

jP1

P2

i

j

P1

P2





























a

j




























a

P1

P2

i

P1

P2





























a a a a a a a a a a a a aj

ai






tan-1 j

i

(j: measurement point 2 coordinate value – measurement point 1 coordinate value)

4-235

(3) f = 3.; Y-Z surface

Measurement


m = 3.

+Y

m = 4.

Y

m = 5.

Z j

i P2

































P1

P1

P2

















j

i

a

















a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aM3S104a a a a a a a a a a a a























a aa aa aa a

ai

j

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

P1

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

P2

i

j

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

P1

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

P2



























a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a

j


























a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

P1

a a a

a a a

a a a

P2

i

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

P1

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

P2



























a a a a a a a a a a a a aaaaa

j

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

ai

a






tan-1 j

i(j: measurement point 2 coordinate value – measurement point 1 coordinate value)

4-236

4-18-6 Program and measurement pattern chart

Group WORK No. Measurement Patterns (m1)

9110

9111

9120

9121

9122

A

B

M3S104

M3S105

M3S106

M3S107

M3S108

1. 2. 3.

ID OD ID ¬

a aa aa aa aa a

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

1. 2.

a aa aa aa aa a

aaaaa

3. 4.

aaaaa

a aa aa aa aa a

X groove width Y groove width X step width Y step width







a a a a a a a a a a a a a1. +X 2. -X

3. +Y

4. -Y5. -Z

1. 2. 3.

Hole center Boss center Hole center ¬

1. 2. 3. 4.

X groove center Y groove center X step center Y step center

a aa aa aa aa aa a

aaaaa

a aa aa aa aa aa a

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

a aa aa aa aa aa a

aaaa

aaaa

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

aaa

aaa

a a a

a a a

a a a

4-237

Group Group No. Measurement Patterns (m1)

B 9123

C 9130

(9135)

1, 2: angle with Y-axis

3, 4: angle with X-axis

1, 2: angle with Z-axis

5: angle with X-axis

3, 4: angle with Z-axis

5: angle with Y-axis

M3S109

M3S110



a aa aa aa aa aa a

a aa aa aa aa aa a

a aa aa aa aa aa aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a


a aa aa aa aa aa a



1.

4.

2.

3.

5.

8.

6.

7.

Outside corner Inside corner

f=1.

2.3.

4.

1.Y

X

X-Y surface

f=2.

2.

5.

1.Z

X

X-Z surface

f=3.

4.

5.

3.Z

Y

Y-Z surface

4-238

4-18-7 Output of measurement results

1. Contents of printout

The contents of the printout are automatically controlled by the type of data

processing system being used. A maximum of 8 items can be included in one

print cycle.

Format (Differs by contents of the printout)

Millimeter: Integer: up to four figures;

Decimal: down to three decimal places.

Inch: Integer: up to four figures;

Decimal: down to four decimal places.

(1) Workpiece No. and workpiece count

The workpiece number and workpiece count number designated by the

argument W of initialized workpiece measurement (WNO. 9100) are printed.

An example follows:

WNO 1234 COUNT 1

(2) Target values

The printout includes a comment which indicates the automatically calculated

target value (“MARK DATA”) and the measurement pattern. The format of this

comment is indicated in the following table:

Measurement pattern Comment

Inner diameter/outer diameter MARK DATA HOL/BOS DIA

Groove/step width MARK DATA GRV/STP WIDTH

Surface to surface MARK DATA FACE-FACE

Surface to groove/step center MARK DATA FACE-GRV/STP

Surface to hole/boss center MARK DATA FACE-HOL/BOS

Surface to corner MARK DATA FACE-CNR

Groove/step center to groove/step center MARK DATA GRV/STP-GRV/STP

Groove/step center to hole/boss center MARK DATA GRV/STP-HOL/BOS

Groove/step center to corner MARK DATA GRV/STP-CNR

Hole/boss center to hole/boss center MARK DATA HOL/BOS-HOL/BOS

Hole/boss center to corner MARK DATA HOL/BOS-CNR

Corner to corner MARK DATA CNR-CNR

X-Y surface slant MARK DATA SLANT X-Y

X-Z surface slant MARK DATA SLANT X-Z

Y-Z surface slant MARK DATA SLANT Y-Z

4-239

(3) Measured values

The actually measured lengths and angles are also printed in the comments

according to the format shown below.

Length Angle Comment

Length on X-axis Angle with X-axis MEASURED DATA X

Length on Y-axis Angle with Y-axis MEASURED DATA Y

Length on Z-axis Angle with Z-axis MEASURED DATA Z

ID/OD or X-Y surface

length (|X2+Y2)

MEASURED DATA R

(4) Tolerance ranges

The following value is printed out:

(upper tolerance limit – lower tolerance limit) / 2.

The example below assumes an upper tolerance limit of u = 0.3 and a lower

tolerance limit of v = 0:

TOLERANCE 0.150

(5) Error and judgment

The value representing “measured value” – “target value” is printed, along with

the results of the tolerance judgment.

Format examples are indicated below:

Error judgement results Comment

Within tolerance/outside compensation range CHECK OK

Within tolerance/in compensation range CHECK OK/WARNING

Outside tolerance range CHECK LIMIT OVER ALARM

(6) Compensation tool No./compensation offset No.

Either the tool number designated by argument “Ss” or the offset number will

be printed.

Tool No. for tool No. 25: TOOL NO. 25

Offset No. for offset No. 25: OFFSET NO. 25

(7) Pre-compensation tool data/offset data

This function prints out the value of the data listed in (6) above before offset

compensation is made. If the data to be printed is tool data, it will all refer to

tool diameter with the exception of Z-axis step difference measurement, which

will be tool length.

For tool data: TOOL DATA 20.000

For offset data: OFFSET DATA 10.000

4-240

(8) Post-compensation tool data/offset data

This function prints the new data as listed in (6) above, after offset compensa-

tion has been made.

For tool data: NEW TOOL DATA 19.950

For offset data: NEW OFFSET DATA 9.975

- Items printed

{: Printout ×: Not printout

No. Item

Tolerance

indicated/

Not indicated

Tolerance

indicated/

Not indicated

Judgment

results outside

compensation

Compensation

mode

(1)Workpiece No. and

workpiece count{ { {

(2) Target value { { {

(3) Measured value { { {

(4) Tolerance range × { {

(5) Error and judgment × { {

(6)Compensation tool

number/offset number× × {

(7)Pre-compensation tool

data/offset data× × {

(8)Post-compensation tool

data/offset data× × {

2. Measurement results and display on screen

Under normal circumstances measurement results are verified by the printout,

but they can also be verified at the PARAMETER COMMON VARIABLE

display if no printout command has been made.

This display can also be for measurements between two random points if the

purpose is to verify the measurement coordinates themselves and not the

distance between coordinates.

Address Data contained at address

#135 Workpiece No.

#136 Workpiece count

#145 Target value

#146 Measured value

#147 Tolerance range ((u–v)/2)

4-241

Address Data contained at address

#152 Tolerance judgment OK range (q × #147)

#153 Judgment results:

1. OK

2. WARNING

3. Tolerance over ALARM

#162 X coordinate value of measurement point 1

#163 Y coordinate value of measurement point 1

#164 Z coordinate value of measurement point 1

#168 X coordinate value of measurement point 2

#169 Y coordinate value of measurement point 2

#170 Z coordinate value of measurement point 2

4-18-8 Alarm displays

An NC alarm will be generated in the event that a programming error or a

malfunction in the touch sensor prevents an accurate measurement from being

made or in case of tolerance over state. Macro user alarm No. 979 will be

displayed on the CRT screen if an alarm is generated.

Alarm message will be displayed in the OPERATOR MESSAGE item on the

maintenance display.

Alarm No./Message Remarks

901

PARAMETER ERROR

Data processing system parameter value is not correct.

902

INITIALZ ARGUMENT ERROR

Argument data is not correct in workpiece measurment initial

setting program.

903

MEASURE ARGUMENT ERROR

Argument data is not correct in measurement operation program.

904

JUDGE ARGUMENT ERROR

Argument data is not correct in tolerance judgment printout

program.

905

PATTERN GROUP MISS MATCH

Mismatch between tolerance judgment printout program and

measurement pattern group

906

ARGUMENT E ERROR

The value of “Ee” in measurement B tolerance judgment does

not match the measurement pattern.

907

CORRECTION APPOINT ERR.

A compensation command has been made in measurement B

tolerance judgment program for an item for which compensation

is not possible.

910

TOLERANCE OVER

Results of tolerance judgment show a tolerance over state.

912

MMS NOT TOUCH

Tool does not touch the workpiece, when touch sensor

measurement operation.

4-242

4-18-9 Program and printout example

1. The following example illustrates tool diameter compensation made for Tool No.

20 as the result of ID measurement.

M3S111

50.

50.

10.

5

+ 0.30

z50.

ID

Print out

Program (EIA/ISO)

G65 P9100 W1234. R10. K3 Q0.5;

G65 P9110 M101. X-50. Y-50. Z-5. D50.;

G65 P9115 U0.3 V0. S20.;

RESULT OF MEASURING

WNO 1234 COUNT 1

MARK DATA HOL/BOS DIA

MEASURED DATA R

TOLERANCE

CHECK OK/WARNING

TOOL NO

TOOL DATA

NEW TOOL DATA

END

50.150

50.064

0.150

0.036

20

10.000

9.914

%%

The values q = 0.5; d = 50.; u = 0.3; and v = 0 would cause an alarm to be

generated if the measured value was greater than 50.3 or less than 50. If the result

were 50.075 <measured value<50.225, the result would be CHECK OK and no

compensation would be made.

4-243

2. The following example illustrates compensation made for Offset No. 30 as

the result of a measurement made from hole center to surface.

M3S112

60.

100.

60±0.1

P1

z60.

P2

10.

20.

Program (EIA/ISO)

G65 P9100 W5678. R10. K4 Q0.5;

G65 P9122 M11. X-100. Y-60. Z-20. D60.;

G65 P9120 M122. X-40. Y-60. Z-20.;

G65 P9125 E1. U0.1 V-0.1 S30. B-1.;

RESULT OF MEASURING

WNO 5678 COUNT 1

MARK DATA FACE-HOLE/BOS

(P1)

(P2)

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a




MEASURED DATA X






TOLERANCE

CHECK OK/WARNING

OFFSET NO

OFFSET DATA

NEW OFFSET DATA

END

Print out

60.000

60.053

0.100

0.053

30

10.000

9.947

%%

If the value “B-1.” were not designated, the offset data would become 10.053.

4-244

3. The following example illustrates a measurement made between two outside

corner points and a tolerance judgment made along the X-axis and the Y-axis.

M3S113

80±0.1

P1

10.

60±0.05

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

15.

15.

10.

P2

Program (EIA/ISO)

G65 P9100 W2468. R15. K5. Q0.5;

G65 P9123 M14. X-80. Y0. Z-10. I15.;

G65 P9123 M122 X0. Y-60. Z-10. I15.;

G65 P9125 E1. U0.1 V-0.1;

G65 P9125 E2. U0.05 V-0.05;

RESULT OF MEASURING

WNO 2468 COUNT 1

MARK DATA CNR-CNR

(P1)

(P2)

MEASURED DATA X

TOLERANCE

CHECK OK

END

MARK DATA CNR-CNR

MEASURED DATA Y

TOLERANCE

CHECK LIMIT OVER ALARM

END

%%

Print out

80.000

80.047

0.100

0.047

60.000

60.051

0.050

0.051

%%

The above example could also be applied to a step width measurement.

4-245

4. Continuous measuring of X-axis distance between hole center and groove

center, and Y-axis distance between hole center and plane.

M3S114

P1P2

60±0.1

15.

72±0.05

120.

P2’48.

20.

32. z60.

Program (EIA/ISO)

G65 P9100 W3690. R20. K3. Q0.5;

G65 P9122 M11. X-48. Y-60. Z-15. D60.;

G65 P9121 M21. X-120. Y-60. Z-15. D32.;

G65 P9125 E1. U0.05 V-0.05;

G65 P9120 M124. X-120. Y0.Z-15.;

G65 P9125 E2. U0.1 V-0.1;

RESULT OF MEASURING

WNO 3690 COUNT 1

MARK DATA GRV/STP-HOL/BOS

(P1)

(P2)

(P2’)

MEASURED DATA X

TOLERANCE

CHECK OK/WARNING

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a





END

MARK DATA FACE-HOL/BOS

MEASURED DATA Y

TOLERANCE

CHECK OK

END

%%

Print out

72.000

71.963

0.050

–0.037

60.000

59.952

0.100

–0.048

%%

4-246

5. Measuring slant angle between two planes on X-Y plane

Tolerance: ±0.2 deg.

M3S115

30°30°

110.270.

200.

200.

420.

130.

20.10.

Program (EIA/ISO)

G65 P9100 W1496. R10. K5. Q0.5;

G65 P9130 F1. M3. X-420. Y-200. Z-20.;

G65 P9135 I200. A-30. U0.2 V-0.2;

G65 P9130 F1. M102. X-130. Y-270. Z-20;

G65 P9135 I110. A30. U0.2 V-0.2;

MARK DATA SLANT X-Y

MEASURED DATA X

TOLERANCE

CHECK OK

END

MARK DATA SLANT X-Y

MEASURED DATA Y

TOLERANCE

CHECK OK

END

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

%%

Print out

RESULT OF MEASURING

WNO 1496 COUNT 1

30.000

29.925

0.200

0.063

30.000

29.925

0.200

0.075

%%

Argument K is not effective for this function. However, specify a positive value.

4-247

4-19 Commercial Printer Connect Function

The commercial printer connect function (option) allows the MAZATROL M-32 and

a commercial printer to be connected.

This section describes how to set the various parameters required for printer

operation with the MAZATROL M-32, as well as how to connect a printer. The

parameter data to be set differs according to the type of printer to be used.

Before using the connect feature, you should carefully read this section to use the

feature to its maximum.

4-19-1 Printers Yamazaki Mazak recommends

Yamazaki Mazak recommends that the following printers be used for the M-32:

Epson EX-800 or FX-800

Citizen LSP-120S

All these three types of printers require a serial I/F (interface).

4-19-2 Cabling

Connect an RS-232C I/F (interface) cable between the M-32 and the printer to be

used, as follows:

Connect the cable to

of the M-32. Printer

SerialI/F

RS-232C I/F cable

M3S116

4-248

The wiring of the RS-232C I/F cable differs according to the manufacturer of the

printer and the control method used for that printer. See below.

1. EX-800, FX-800

Printer NC

1 { { 1

2 { { 2

3 { { 3

4 { { 5

5 { { 7

7 { { 6

6 { { 20

20 {

2. LSP-120S (Data Busy Method)

Printer NC

1 { { 1

2 { { 2

3 { { 3

7 { { 5

11 { { 7

6 { { 6

20 { { 20

4-19-3 Specification of the printer

1. Interface : RS-232C

2. Data transmission : Asynchronous

3. Baud rate (bps) : 110, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200

(bits/sec)

4. Character length : 8-bit

Stop bits : 2-bit

Parity : None

5. Transfer method : RTS/CTS

4-249

4-19-4 Specification of the printer

Parameters G6 through G8, G10, and G13 through G18 are provided to

compensate for any differences in specifications according to the type of

commercial printer to be used.

The settings of these parameter to be used for the Epson or Citizen printers

Yamazaki Mazak recommends are listed below.

Address Description Epson Citizen

G6

G7

G8

G10 Printer baud rate

G13 Setting type and character mode 2368 320

G14 Printing direction mode and forward line feed mode

G15 13078 32304

G16 65535 4095

G17

G18

10756

32770

65535

2:4800 bps (bits/sec)

15420

Graphic mode

Line feed width for graphics

13055

65535

Line feed width for characters

4-19-5 Explication of the setting parameter data

1. Setting parameters

Setting parameters is executed in decimal numbers. Taking the Epson printers

as an example, this section describes parameter data to be set from control

codes.

G6 — G8ASCII ESC * m n1 n2

Hexadecimal 1B 2A 04 80 02

G6 ( 2 A 0 4 ) *H

0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

See the following part 3., “List of codes”, to check 2A, the

hexadecimal equivalent of the asterisk (*) in ASCII code.

G7 ( 8 0 0 2 ) H

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

*H: Hexadecimal

Decimal

10756

Decimal

32770

4-250

Left-justify (F)H when it is not to be used.

G8

( F F F F ) H

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Decimal

65535

G13

The following two setting types are provided, and one of them must be

specified using the appropriate bit:

Setting type Set-data type

DC1 (on line) flag

Character mode

ASCII ESC @

HEX 1B 40

Set-data type Type 0 or 1 is selected automatically, depending on the

input data setting method being used during character

output.

Printout Input data

0 Input data is printed in a form

rotated through 90 degrees in

a counterclockwise direction.

1 Input data is printed in a form

rotated through 90 degrees in

a clockwise direction and left-

right symmetrically.

(Example of output)

( 0 9 4 0 ) H

0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

Character mode setting

Set-data type yes/no (1/0)

DC1 (on line) flag yes/no (1/0)

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

(0)(1)(2)(3)(4)(5)(6)(7)

Buff

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

(0)(1)(2)(3)(4)(5)(6)(7)

Buff

Decimal

2368

M3S118

M3S119

M3S117

4-251

G14

( 3 C ) H ( 3 C ) H

0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0

ASCII ESC <

HEX 1B 3C

Example:

Printing direction mode Forward line feed mode

ASCII ESC <

HEX 1B 3C

Forward line feed mode setting

Printing direction mode setting

Decimal

15420

G15, G16

ASCII ESC 3 n

HEX 1B 33 16

Example:

0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0

G15 ( 3 3 1 6 ) H

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

G16 ( F F F F ) H

Decimal

65535

Decimal

13078

G17, G18

Example:

0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

G17 ( 3 2 F F ) H

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

G18 ( F F F F ) H

ASCII ESC 2

HEX 1B 32

Decimal

13055

Decimal

65535

4-252

2. Control codes to be used

Epson Citizen

ASCII ASCII

Hexadecimal Hexadecimal

ESC * m n1 n2 ESC * m n1 n2

1B 2A 04 80 02 1B 2A 04 80 02

ESC @ ESC @

1B 40 1B 40

ESC < ESC <

1B 3C 1B 3C

ESC < ESC <

1B 3C 1B 3C

ESC 3 n(n/216) ESC 0 n(n/144)

1B 33 16 1B 7E 30 OF

ESC 2 ESC 2

1B 32 1B 32

Graphic mode

G6 G8

Character mode

G14

Printing direction mode

G13

Forward line feed mode

G14

Line feed width (for graphics)

G15, G16

Line feed width (for characters)

G17, G18

3. List of codes

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

2 SP ! ” # $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - . /

3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?

4 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O

5 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ • ]

6 a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o

7 p q r s t u v w x y z { } DEL

4-253

4. Device connection (NC side)

RD (Receive Data)

1

FG (Frame Ground)

SG (Signal Ground)

7

3

4

5

6

20

2

SD (Send Data)

RS (Request to Send)

CS (Possible to Send)

DR (Data Set Ready)

ER (NC Ready)

Minimize the DR-ER distance

when DR is not to be used.

Output

Output

Output

Input

Input

Input

Input/

Output

M3S120

Connector : DBM-25S (Japan Aviation Electronics Ind.) or equivalent

Fixed terminal block : D-20418-J2 (Japan Aviation Electronics Ind.) or

equivalent

Maximum cable length : 15 m (590.55 in.)

Signal levels

Voltage : +3 V or more when ON

3 V or less when OFF

4-254

5. Pin assignments

13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

{ { { { { { { { { { { { {

{ { { { { { { { { { { {

25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14

NC unit side connector: DBM-25S (Japan Aviation Electronics

Ind.) or equivalentM3S121

6. Signal description

Pin

No.

Signal

Name

Signal Send direction

NC R I/O deviceDescription

1 FG Frame ground

7 SG Signal ground

2 SD Outgoing data from the NC

3 RD Incoming data to the NC

4 RS Now sending data:

The ON status of this signal indicates that the NC is now sending

data.

5 CS Possible to send data:

The ON status of this signal indicates that data can be sent from the

NC.

A data-sending temporary stop request to the NC is made by turning

this signal OFF.

6 DR Data Set Ready:

When this signal is ON, the printer is regarded as ready for printing.

The signal must remain ON during printing. This signal is checked

when printer starts or during data sending from the printer, and if the

signal is OFF, the I/O device will be regarded as not yet ready for

operation.

20 ER NC Ready:

This signal will turn ON when power is turned on and the I/O device

becomes operative. This signal remains ON until power has been

turned off.

4-255

7. Timing chart for RTS/CTS control method

ER (20) (Output)

DR (6) (Input)

CS (5) (Input)

SD (2) (Output)

RS (4) (Output)

RD (3) (Input)






a a a a a a a a a a a










1 to 3 characters

M3S122

4-256

- NOTE -

(4-257)

4-20 EIA COMMAND Display

Function:

- Call up the EIA COMMAND display to check further details of the operational

status of the machine during EIA/ISO program operation.

- Also, call up this display to select the program to be executed for automatic

operation, or to select execution conditions for automatic operation.

- In addition, this display can be used to check details of some specific modal data

and the contents of the active program.

Data of the EIA COMMAND display:

M3S123

POSITION

X 99999.999

Y 0.

Z 0.

B 0.

A 0.

— BUFFER

X 99999.999

Y 0.

Z 0.

B 0.

A 0.

”

MACHINE

X 99999.999

Y 0.

Z 0.

B 0.

A 0.

“ REMAIN

X 99999.999

Y 0.

Z 0.

B 0.

A 0.

‘

NEXT COMMAND

G 00

M 999 999 999 999

T 12345678

B 180

”

WPC (WK.PIE.COOR)

X 99999.999

Y 0.

Z 0.

B 0.

A 0.

‘

WORK NO. 9999 ( )◊

UNIT NO. 99999 ( )ÿ

BLOCK NO. 99 ( )Ÿ

TOOL OFFSET

D#(123) 9999.999

H#(123) 9999.999

⁄

ACTIVE DATA

G# 1 17 91 23 94

20 40 49 80 98

50 54 64 67

69 97 15 50.1 17.1

45.1

M# 999

PROGRAM

N200 G0X100.001Y100.001Z100.001;

S2300M3M8X12.939Y22.222F.01;

Z 999.999;

N300 G23Z0;

TNO. 12345678

PKNO. 1

PALLET NO. 1

HEAD NO. 1

RPM(3) 100000

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

M/MIN

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

MM/REV

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

MM/MIN

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

LOAD METER

SPINDL 0%

X-AXIS 0%

Y-AXIS 0%

Z-AXIS 0%

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

* * * COMMAND * * * EIA/ISO



POSITION X, Y, Z mm (inch) Current position of the tool tip in the workpiece coordinate system

POSITION 4, 5 Degrees ( ° ) or mm(inch)

Current position of the tool tip in the workpiece coordinate system(when an additional axis is provided)

MACHINE X, Y, Z mm (inch) Current position of the machine in the machine coordinate system

MACHINE 4, 5 Degrees ( ° ) or mm(inch)

Current position of the machine in the machine coordinate system(when an additional axis is provided)

—

“

4-258


BUFFER X, Y, Z mm (inch) Moving distance of each axis in the next block to be executed

BURRER 4, 5 Degrees ( ° ) or mm

(inch)

Moving distance of an additional axis in the next block to be executed

(when an additional axis is provided)

REMAIN X, Y, Z mm (inch) The remaining distance of movement of each axis in the block

currently being executed

REMAIN 4, 5 Degrees ( ° ) or mm

(inch)

The remaining distance of movement of an additional axis in the block

currently being executed


WPC (WK.PIE.COOR.)

X, Y, Z

mm (inch) Work zero-point position in the machine coordinate system

WPC (WK.PIE.COOR.)

4, 5

Degrees ( ° ) or mm

(inch)

Work zero-point position in the machine coordinate system


÷ NEXT COMMAND

G, M, T, B

The G-, M-, T-, and B-codes preset in the next block to be executed

WORK NO. Workpiece number of the program currently being executed

( ) If a subprogram is currently being executed, the workpiece number of

that subprogram will be displayed in parentheses.

ÿ UNIT NO. Number of the unit currently being executed.

If the unit currently being executed is a five-face unit or a face

definition unit, the number of the unit will be displayed in brackets.

Ÿ BLOCK NO. Sequence number currently being executed (for EIA/ISO programs,

however, the block number currently being executed)

If the sequence currently being executed is a five-face sequence or a

face definition sequence, the number of that sequence will be

displayed in brackets.

TOOL OFFSET D# Tool diameter compensation value.

The tool diameter compensation number is displayed in parentheses.

TOOL OFFSET H# Tool length compensation value.

The tool length compensation number is displayed in parentheses.

TNO. Spindle tool number

A group number, if specified, is displayed instead.

PKNO. Spindle tool number

PALLET NO. Pallet number

HEAD NO. Spindle head number (only for five-face machining specifications)

RPM Revolutions per minute

The gear number is displayed in parentheses.

M/MIN m/min (feet/min) Circumferential speed of the spindle

MM/MIN mm/min (inch/min) Feed rate per minute

MM/REV mm/rev (inch/rev) Feed rate per revolution

LOAD METER % Load rates of the spindle, the X-axis, the Y-axis, and the Z-axis

PROGRAM Program monitor

Four lines of program data from the block being executed are

displayed.

This display is not made for MAZATROL programs.

MODAL DATA G# Currently valid G-code in all modal groups

MODAL DATA M# Currently valid M-code

‘

’

◊

⁄

”

4-259

Display operations:

The EIA COMMAND display can be called up using the procedure described

below.

[1] Press and hold down the display selector key (green key located to the left of

the menu keys) until the following menu has been displayed:

EIA/ISO

INFORM.

MODAL

INFORM.

ALARM PROCESS

CONTROL

MEASURE MONITOR ARRANGE EIA/ISO

COMMAND

HARD

COPY

[2]-1 Press the menu key EIA/ISO COMMAND .

- This calls up the EIA COMMAND display.

[2]-2 Press the menu key MONITOR.

- This displays the following menu:

POSITION COMMAND TRACE PROGRAM

MONITOR

MODAL

INFORM.

ALARM EIA/ISO

COMMAND

Then press the menu key EIA/ISO COMMAND .

- This calls up the EIA COMMAND display.

It is possible to input workpiece coordinate values on this display.

The input procedures are the same as with the COMMAND display.

4-20-1 Description of the monitoring function

1. Display of the currently active block

Currently active block is displayed on the first line in reverse form.

During the operation it is displayed purple, and otherwise, blue in reverse form.

Example:

G00Z50.;

X 100. Y 100.;

Z0;

X0Y0;

If the block consists of multiple lines, only the first line will be displayed in

reverse form.

2. Display form and screen scrolling

A block for four lines is displayed according to the WK. PROGRAM (EIA/ISO)

display. During the period other than operating, the first four lines of the

program are displayed. During the operation, the currently active block is

displayed on the first line, and as the active block proceeds, the screen data is

scrolled. The following shows how the screen scrolling is carried out.

G00Z50.;

X 100. Y 100.;

Z0;

X0Y0;





















X 100. Y 100.;

Z0;

X0Y0;

G00G90G54;

Execution

4-260

3. Subprogram display

During use of subprogram call from the main program, program monitor display

will change over to subprogram display when execution control is transferred to

that subprogram.

Likewise, subprogram display will change over to main program display when

execution control is transferred from the subprogram back to the main program.

M98P200;

X100.;

Y100.;

Z0;

O200;

G00G90;

X0;

Y0;

Calling subprogram

Main program Subprogram

4-20-2 Notes

1. Program monitor display is not made during selection of MAZATROL programs.

If an EIA/ISO program is called up from a MAZATROL program, only the

EIA/ISO subprogram data will be displayed.

2. The contents of the menu displayed, after this display has been selected, are

the same as those of the menus presented on the COMMAND display,

irrespective of the type of operation mode (manual, automatic, or MDI).

3. Program monitor display is made only during memory operation.

4. When a macrostatement is displayed on the program monitor display, only if

the line immediately succeeding the macrostatement is the first line, then the

head space will be deleted and the rest will be displayed in left-justfied form.

5. In case of block skipping, if the block immediately succeeding that which has

been skipped is currently active, then the skipped block remains on the first

line in the program monitor display.

Example:

Setting block skip 1:

/1 X10.; . . . . . Skipped block

Y10.; . . . . . Active block

Z10.;

M02.;

4-261

4-21 MAZATROL Program DC Input/Output (Option)


The MAZATROL program DC input/output function allows not only the

conventional DNC interface and CMT interface, but also a PTP/PTR interface

(paper tape I/O interface), to be used to transfer MAZATROL programs using

the data I/O function of the M-32.

M3S124

MAZATROL M-32

NC equipment

MAZATROL programP

T

P

/

P

T

R

Paper tape reader/puncher

RS232C

4-21-2 Transfer condition

The conditions for MAZATROL DC input/output with tape I/O are listed below.

1. A special interface for a paper tape reader/puncher must be used to transfer

MAZATROL programs.

2. Program data must be transferred under DC control or RTS/CTS control, via an

RS-232C cable.

3. Of all the functions provided by the TAPE I/O display, those listed below can

be used to operate a MAZATROL program.

- LOAD

- ALL LOAD

- PUNCH

- ALL PUNCH

- COMPARE

- ALL COMPARE

- TAPE SEARCH

- REWIND

4-262

4. To transfer MAZATROL program data, the required end-of-program characters

must be appended beforehand since, unlike EIA/ISO programs, original

MAZATROL programs do not include a code, such as M30 or M99, that

denotes the end of the program.

The end of a MAZATROL program is identified by the ASCII code characters

that have been specified in parameters G51, G52, and G53.

G51 . . . . 45H (“E”)

G52 . . . . 4EH (“N”)

G53 . . . . 44H (“D”)

In the example shown above, the list of the characters END denotes the end of

the program.

4-21-3 Operating procedures

How to carry out MAZATROL DC control operation is the same as for the

conventional data IN/OUT function (tape I/O function). Refer to section 4-9-3 DATA

IN/OUT (TAPE) display .

Example :

PUNCH operation

[1] Set paper tape onto the tape puncher, and call up the DATA IN/OUT (TAPE)

display.


[3] Using the numeric key(s), specify the workpiece number of the

MAZATROL program to be output. Then, press the input key .





operated.


whose contents are currently being punched.

- After punching of specified programs, the reverse-display status of START

will be released.

4-21-4 Description of parameters

Address Description

G51 to G53 - The end-of-program codes to be used with MAZATROL programDC input/output

- Set these codes in ASCII form.

4-263

4-21-5 Notes

1. Do not alter the end-of-program codes that have once been set. The NC

equipment will not be able to identify the end of the MAZATROL program, if,

after punching of the program data with the PTP/PTR function, the end-of-

program codes set previously in parameter G51, G52, and G53 are altered and

the data-loading operation is carried out.

2. When MAZATROL DC input/output is not valid, the alarm 439 MAZATROL

PROGRAM DESIGNATED will occur if an attempt is made to set the

workpiece number of a MAZATROL program on the TAPE I/O display.

3. When MAZATROL DC input/output is not valid, the alarm 555 MAZATROL

PROGRAM DESIGNATED will occur if an attempt is made to load the data of

a MAZATROL program following completion of selection of ALL LOAD on the

TAPE I/O display.

4. The alarm 513 PROG. SOFTWARE NOT COINCIDENT will occur if an

attempt is made to load program other than those for M-32.

5. If the specified end-of-program codes mismatch to the required ones, the alarm

558 PROGRAM END NOT FOUND will occur when EOR is detected.

ASCII codes list:

Code(hexadeci-mal digit)

CharacterCode

(hexadeci-mal digit)

CharacterCode


CharacterCode


Character

30 0 41 A 4B K 55 U

31 1 42 B 4C L 56 V

32 2 43 C 4D M 57 W

33 3 44 D 4E N 58 X

34 4 45 E 4F O 59 Y

35 5 46 F 50 P 5A Z

36 6 47 G 51 Q

37 7 48 H 52 R

38 8 49 I 53 S

39 9 4A J 54 T

4-264

4-22 Program Management Functions

When an EIA/ISO program or MAZATROL program is transferred using M-32 tape

I/O function, the name of the program which is to be set on the PROGRAM FILE

display can be assigned to that program before starting the transfer operation.

imitations on the usable workpiece number of programs are provided, and for some

specific program numbers, erasure and editing of programs and their call-out on the

WK. PROGRAM display are prohibited.

The following three functions are available:

- Prohibition of selected-program editing

- Prohibition of selected-program call

- Selected-program erasure

4-22-1 Prohibition of selected-program editing

Irrespective of the valid or invalid status of the write protect key, execution of the

operations listed in the table below is disabled for the selected program.

The alarm 406 MEMORY PROTECT will occur if an attempt is made to carry out

these operations.

Type of display Prohibited item

WK. PROGRAM display(MAZATROL, EIA/ISO)

- Modifying the selected program

PROGRAM FILE display - Erasing the selected program- Registering the selected program- Renumbering the selected program- Execution of ALL ERASE erases all programs, except the

selected ones.

4-22-2 Prohibition of selected-program call

Display of the contents of the selected program is prohibited.

The alarm 402 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT will occur if an attempt is made to

carry out for the selected program the operations listed in the table below.


WK. PROGRAM display(MAZATROL, EIA/ISO)

- Searching for the workpiece number of the selectedprogram

- Copying from the selected program (unit copying andshape copying included)

PROGRAM FILE display - Renumbering the selected program

PROGRAM MONITORdisplay

- Displaying the selected program for monitoring purposes(No alarms will result even if an attempt is made to call upthe selected program.)

EIA COMMAND display - Displaying the selected program for monitoring purposes(No alarms will result even if an attempt is made to call upthe selected program.)

4-265


DATA IN/OUT display(CMT, DNC, PTP/PTR)

- Saving or punching the selected program- If ALL PUNCH is executed using PTP/PTR, the selected

program will not be punched.- The alarm 517 (or 547 or 587) PROG. OPERATION NOT

ALLOWED will occur if an attempt is made to execute asaving or punching operation under a previously set statusof the workpiece number of the selected program.

- Loading of the selected program is possible.

4-22-3 Selected-program erasure

All-program erasure, which was possible with the conventional all-program erasure

function, has become impossible, except in the cases listed below, because of

addition of the new function described previously in section 4-22-1 above. Only

programs other than the selected ones are erased by all-program erasure.

The cases, where batch erasure of all programs (including the selected one) is

possible, are as follows:

- When installing the system

- If the program within the NC equipment have been destroyed

In those cases, batch erasure of all programs becomes possible by setting 1 in

parameter F82.

Display operation:

[1] When the PROGRAM FILE display is called up on the screen, the following

menu will be displayed in the menu display area:

RENUMBER PROGRAM

ERASE

ALL

ERASE

PROGRAM PREVIOUS

PAGE

NEXT

PAGE

[2] Press the menu key ALL ERASE , then key in –9999 using the numeric keys,

and press the input key .

Whether all programs are to be erased at any one time or only the programs within

the selected program number range are to be erased, can be specified by setting

data in parameter F82 as follows :

F82= 0: The programs within the selected range erased

= 1: All programs erased

4-266


Address Descriptions

H91 Program management function

Prohibition of editing(Programs of the order of #9000)

Prohibition of call(Programs of the order of #9000)

Prohibition of editing(Programs of the orders of #8000/#9000)

Prohibition of call(Programs of the orders of #8000/#9000)

F82 Total erasing of programs0: The programs other than the selected ones erased1: All programs erased

7 5 4 3 2 16 0

4-23 Program-Name Tape Input/Output


When an EIA/ISO program or MAZATROL program is transferred using M-32 tape

I/O function, the name of the program which is to be set on the PROGRAM FILE

display can be assigned to that program before starting the transfer operation.

4-23-2 Transfer conditions

The following lists conditions for input or output of a program name using the tape

I/O functions:

1. Input or output of program names is possible only if the program-name tape I/O

function has been made valid using parameter G46.

2. Of all the functions presented on the TAPE I/O display, only those listed below

can be used to transfer program names to or from a tape.

- LOAD

- ALL LOAD

- PUNCH

- ALL PUNCH

- COMPARE

- ALL COMPARE

4-267

4-23-3 Operating procedures

The operating procedures to be used on the TAPE I/O display are the same as

those which are to be carried out on the conventional DATA IN/OUT (TAPE)

function. Refer to section 4-9-3 DATA IN/OUT (TAPE) display of the operating

manual.

Example :

PUNCH operation

[1] Set a paper tape in the tape puncher, and call up the DATA IN/OUT (TAPE)

display.


[3] Specify the work number of the program to be transferred, and press the

input key .

- The entered work number will then be displayed and the cursor will move to

the parentheses located to the immediate right of that data item.


- This highlights the START menu and operates the tape puncher.

- The cursor blinks at the workpiece number of the program being punched.

- The highlighted status of the START menu will be cleared when punching of

that program completes.

4-23-4 Tape format

The name of the program transferred to or from a tape must be designated as

follows:

1. For an EIA/ISO program

Set the control-out code “(” after the five-digit number beginning with O, then

set the program name and the control-in code “)”, in that order.

Example :

O1234(COMMENT1234);

≠

Program name

4-268

2. For a MAZATROL program

Set the control-out code “(” after the five-digit number beginning with O, and

then set the program ID code, a colon “:”, the program name, and the control-

in code “)”, in that order.

Example :

O1234(MAZ-211:COMMENT1234);

≠

Program ID code Program name

≠

Note :

The program ID code identifies the M-32 MAZATROL program that will be

transferred to or from a tape.

MAZ-211 ..... M-32 MAZATROL program


Address Description

G46 This parameter determines whether the program-name tape I/O function is to

be made valid or invalid.

0: Invalid 1: Valid

4-23-6 Notes

1. Only the codes listed in the following ASCII codes list can be used as program

names.

If a code not listed in the following ASCII codes list is loaded, the code will be

converted into a null code (20H) and then stored into the internal memory of

the NC unit.

2. The maximum number of name characters which can be stored into the NC

internal memory during one program-name loading operation is 11. If,

therefore, the name to be loaded consists of 12 characters or more, all those

excess characters will be ignored.

4-269

ASCII codes list:

Code(hexadeci-mal digit)

CharacterCode


CharacterCode


CharacterCode


Character

30 0 41 A 4B K 55 U

31 1 42 B 4C L 56 V

32 2 43 C 4D M 57 W

33 3 44 D 4E N 58 X

34 4 45 E 4F O 59 Y

35 5 46 F 50 P 5A Z

36 6 47 G 51 Q

37 7 48 H 52 R 20 SP

38 8 49 I 53 S 2D !

39 9 4A J 54 T 2E .

4-270E

5. PRINTOUT

This operation should be carried out to hardcopy the display data being indicated

on the CRT screen.

[1] Connect the printer cable to the PTP/PTR connector of the NC equipment.

[2] Call the display to be hardcopied.

[3] Press twice the display selector key (green key located to the left of the menu

keys).

- The following menu will then be displayed in the menu display area.

EIA/ISO

INFORM.

MODAL

INFORM.

ALARM PROCESS

CONTROL

HARD

COPY

[4] Press the menu key HARD COPY.

- This will cause the display status of HARD COPY to reverse and the printer

to operate.

- The reverse-display status of HARD COPY will be released when printing of

the display data being displayed is completed.

Notes:

1. The printer stops operating if the following procedure is carried out during

printing.

(1) Press the cursor key , , , or to move the cursor.

(2) Change the display over to another display.

(3) Press the menu key I/O STOP.

2. In the above-mentioned printout operations using HARD COPY, only one

display of a machining program can be hardcopied at a time. When printing out

a machining program prestored within the memory of the NC equipment, the

machining program can be printed out from the first line through the final line

using the menu key PRINT of the WK. PROGRAM display. For details of the

operating procedure, refer to the separate Programming manual (Application).

5-1

- NOTE -

(5-2E)

6. DATA WRITE INHIBIT CONDITIONS

When the program override switch is set to the LOCK (Inhibit) position as illustrated

below, it becomes impossible to override data, except for its specific portions.

The table below represents distinction in type between data that can be overridden

(write enable) and data that cannot be overridden (write disable).

Reprogramming switch

OK: Write enable

NOT OK: Write disable

Data name Unit Description

Position OK

Counter OK

Cutting time NOT OK

WORK NO. OK

GEAR NO. OK

SCALE OK

PLANE SELECT OK

Shape OK

PASS CONTINUE/STEP OK

CUTTING COND NOT OK

Other parameters NOT OK

PROGRAM FILE display NOT OK

Program creation NOT OK

Edition NOT OK

Data search (Unit, tool, etc.) OK

Work No. search OK

DATA IN/OUT display OK

MACRO VARIABLE display COMMON VARIABLE NOT OK

POSITION display

COMMAND display

POSITION display

COMMAND display

TRACE display

TRACE display

PATH CHECK display

SHAPE CHECK display

PARAMETER display

WK. PROGRAM display

6-1

Data name Unit Description

NOM-z/Suffix NOT OK

MAT NOT OK

DEPTH NOT OK

Number of teeth NOT OK

Minimum diameter NOT OK

Angle NOT OK

ALL ERASE NOT OK

TOOL OK

NOM-z/Suffix OK

ACT-z OK

LENGTH OK

COMP. OK

AUXIL. OK

THR/HP. (Option) OK

LIFE OK

TIME OK

TEACH OK

T-DATA MOVE OK

TOOL SEARCH OK

DRUM NO. OK

WORK NO. OK

DRUM NO. OK

SPARE T ERASE OK

PKNO. CLEAR OK

PKNO. SHIFT OK

PKNO. ASSIGN OK

SPARE T ADDITION OK

LAYOUT FINISH OK

TOOL SEARCH OK

LAYOUT CANCEL OK

TOOL ERASE OK

TOOL OFFSET display OK

WORK OFFSET display OK

TOOL FILE display

TOOL DATA display

TOOL LAYOUT display

Note:

With the program override switch left set to the LOCK position, if an attempt is

made to write (or override) data indicated as NOT OK shown above, then the alarm

message 406 MEMORY PROTECT (write disabled) will be displayed.

6-2E

INDEX

Page

A

Added fundamental coordinates function (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-173

ADDITIONAL WPC display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-173

Address setting in the fundamental coordinates unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-174

Alarm display area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

ALARM display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138

Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

ALL COMPARE (NC = TAPE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108

ALL LOAD (TAPE Æ NC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106

ALL PUNCH (NC Æ TAPE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107

All-axis zero-point return button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

ASCII codes list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-253

ATC menu key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

ATC (automatic tool change) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Auxiliary keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Axis-movement buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

B

Brightness adjustment dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

C

Change of scale values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Circle measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-178

Clear key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

COMMAND display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Commercial printer connect function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-248

COMMON VARIABLE display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122

Common variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122

COMPARE (NC = CMT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94

COMPARE (NC = TAPE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107

Compensation function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-202

Coolant menu key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Coordinates write facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-195

Corner R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46

CURRENT display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72

Cursor keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Cutting feed key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Cutting feed override keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

IND-1

D

Data

Erasing data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2E

Data display area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Data specification area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Data write inhibit conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

How to abort data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95

Modifying data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2E

Setting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Data cancellation key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

DATA IN/OUT display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87

DATA IN/OUT (CMT) display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89

DATA IN/OUT (DNC) display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98

DATA IN/OUT (TAPE) display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102

Data management system parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-207

DC input/output function (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-262

Designation by means of the group number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128

DIRECTORY (CMT Æ NC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95

Display

Display erasure key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Display selector key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Display title area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Name of components of each display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Print out of displayed data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Door interlock switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

E

Eccentricity compensation values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-208

EIA COMMAND display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-258

EIA program monitoring functions (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-166

EIA/ISO INFOR display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112

Emergency stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Endmill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

External multi-piece machining function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154

External unit skipping function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152

F

Feed hold button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

First zero-point return indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

First zero-point return key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Five-surface machining option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-191

Five-surface measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-192

IND-2

G

Groove center and step center measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-222

Groove width and step width measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-218

H

Hardcopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Head-of-program indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Hole center and boss center measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-222

I

Inner diameter and outer diameter measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-216

Input key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Input procedure for parts count values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Input procedure for time data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

J

JIG OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157

Jig offsetting function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157

L

LOAD (CMT Æ NC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91

LOAD (HOST Æ NC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99

LOAD (TAPE Æ NC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105

LOCAL VARIABLE display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122

Local variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122

M

Machine failure clear key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Machine failure indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Machining management data writing macro-program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160

Machining management functions (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143

Machining shapes displayed continuously (PLANE CHECK display) . . . . . . 4-33

Machining shapes displayed continuously (SHAPE CHECK display) . . . . . 4-26

Machining shapes displayed intermittently (PLANE CHECK display) . . . . . 4-33

Machining shapes displayed intermittently (SHAPE CHECK display) . . . . . 4-27

Machining shapes displayed on a program unit basis

(SHAPE CHECK display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Macro program (Workpiece measurement printout option) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-210

MACRO VARIABLE display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122

Macro variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122

Main display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Maintenance display key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Making a macro-program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161

Manual measurement of tool length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49

Manual mode (On-machine measurement option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-188

IND-3

Manual pulse feed key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Manual pulse handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

MDI mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-188

MDI run key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

MEASURE display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-179

Measurement

Measurement compensation values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-206

Measurement funciton (workpiece measurement printout option) . . . . . 4-197

Measurement pattern (On-machine measurement option) . . . . . . . . . . 4-176

Measuring procedure (On-machine measurement option) . . . . . . . . . . 4-182

Output of measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-237

MEMORY mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-188

Memory run key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Menu display area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Menu keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Menu selector key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Message display area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

MODAL INFO. display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136

Mode (On-machine measurement option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-188

Monitoring function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-166/257

Multiple process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148

MULTIPLE SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154

N

NC alarm status indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

NEXT display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72

Numeric keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

O

On-machine measurement (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-176

Operating panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Optional display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

OT clear key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Outside and inside corner measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-227

Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

P

PALLET MANAGEMENT display (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143

Pallet menu key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

PARAMETER display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85

Parameter

Parameter registration (Workpiece measurement printout option) . . . . . 4-206

Parameters (Machining management function option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160

Type of PARAMETER subdisplays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86

IND-4

PATH CHECK display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

PLANE CHECK display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

Plane select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Pocket number

Automatic pocket-number assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75

Clearing pocket-numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80

Interchanging pocket numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53

Manual pocket-number assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77

Pocket-number shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74

Setting PKNO data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59

POSITION display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Power OFF button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Power ON button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

PRG. LAYOUT PROCE. display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142

Printout function (Workpiece measurement printout option) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-203

PROCESS WORK display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140

Processor busy status indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Process-number search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140

Program

Erasing a program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Erasing all the registered programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

Registering program names (COMMENT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

PROGRAM FILE display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Program management function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-265

PROGRAM MONITOR display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-166

Program-name tape input/output function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-267

Prohibition of selected-program editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-265

Prohibition of slelected-program call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-265

Program start position designation function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-166/170

Pulse-feed axis selector switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

PUNCH (NC Æ TAPE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106

R

Rapid feed key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Rapid feedreate decrease key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Rapid feedrate indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Registered tool

Erasing all sets of registered tool data (TOOL LIFE INDEX display) . . . 4-136

Erasing the tool data on a tool basis (TOOL LIFE INDEX display) . . . . 4-135

Partial erasure of registered tool data (TOOL LAYOUT display) . . . . . . 4-82

Selection in order of tool registration number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128

Total erasure of registered tool data (TOOL LAYOUT display) . . . . . . . 4-83

Registering milling tool data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

Registering the tools to be used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51

Reprogramming switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

IND-5

Reset key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Re-setting the current position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117

Restart function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-171

Returning speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47

REWIND (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111

S

SAVE (NC Æ CMT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93

SAVE (NC Æ HOST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101

Scheduled-operation function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144

Second zero-point return indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Second zero-point return key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

SECTION CHECK display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Selected-program erasure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-266

Selection in order of length of life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128

Setting menu data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Setting numeric data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Setting the tool data “INVALIDATION” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67

Setting tool data valid or invalid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68

SHAPE CHECK display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

Slant measurement and tolerance judgment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-231

Spare tool

Erasing spare tool data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82

Specifying a spare tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81

Spindle job button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Spindle locked status indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Spindle-rotational direciton change button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Spindle speed override key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Spindle start button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Spindle stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Start button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Stop-of-program indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

STRAIGHTNESS GRAPH display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-190

Straightness measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-181

Subsidiary display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Surface measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-179

Surface measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-220

T

TAPE mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-188

Tape run key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

TAPE SEARCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110

Tool

To display a subsidiary display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Designation by means of the tool number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128

IND-6

Setting tool-compensation data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129

Setting tool group numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127

Setting tool-life control data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132

Tool-compensation data setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115

Tool interference data assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77

Tool unclamped status indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Tolerance judgment function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-200

Tolerance judgment printout A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-220

Tolerance judgment printout B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-228

Tolerance judgment printout C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-231

TOOL DATA display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42

Tool data “GROUP NO. ASSIGNMENT” (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60

Tool data “INVALIDATION” (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67

TOOL FILE (ENDMILL) display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

TOOL LAYOUT display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72

TOOL LIFE INDEX display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126

Tool layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72

TOOL OFFSET DATA display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113

TOOL OFFSET DATA (TYPE A) display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113

TOOL OFFSET DATA (TYPE B) display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114

Tool-data input procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

Touch sensor tool compensation amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-206

Touch-sensor indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18E

TPS key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

TRACE display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

U

UNIT SKIP SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152

V

Variables registering procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124

VFC key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

W

WK. PROGRAM display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

WORK OFFSET DATA display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118

Workpiece

Changing a workpiece number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Input procedure for workpiece coordinate values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120

Setting workpiece zero-point coordinate values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121

Workpiece measurement initial setting (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-214

Workpiece measurement printout system (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-198

IND-7

X

X-axis

Setting X-coordinate values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120

X-axis surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-180

Y

Y-axis

Setting Y-coordinate values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121

Y-axis surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-180

Z

Z-axis

Setting Z-coordinate values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121

Z-axis surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-180

IND-8E

M32 Operating Manual

Documents

Transcript of M32 Operating Manual